JP7344548B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, in pachinko gaming machines, a jackpot determination is performed to determine whether or not a jackpot has been won on the condition that a game ball enters a starter opening that can be opened and closed. When a jackpot determination is made, a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner to notify the jackpot determination result. When the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot in the variable display of the special symbols, a jackpot game involving opening of a jackpot that can be opened and closed is executed (see Patent Document 1).

In the gaming machine according to Patent Document 1, after a jackpot game is executed, the opening/closable starting port may enter a time-saving state in which it is easier to open than the normal gaming state (non-time-saving state).

JP 2018-88993 Publication

However, there is still room for improvement in terms of gaming machines that can be put into a gaming state in which the openable/closable starting port is easier to open than in the normal gaming state (non-time-saving state) in order to improve gaming enjoyment.

A gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention includes:
When a predetermined first variation condition or second variation condition is met, it is possible to execute a variable display of identification information, and when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, a variable prize opening provided in the gaming area that can be opened and closed is opened. In a gaming machine equipped with a game control means for executing a jackpot game with
The game control means is
It is possible to create a specific gaming state in which a variable starting port provided in the gaming area that can be opened and closed is easier to open than in a normal gaming state,
Depending on the end of the jackpot game, the specific game state may be set;
The specific gaming state may be set in response to stopping and displaying the identification information in a non-specific manner different from the specific mode;
Conditions in which the fluctuation time of the fluctuating display of the identification information is different between before the switching condition is established based on a count value counted according to the fluctuating display of the identification information during the specific gaming state and after the switching condition is satisfied. Decided based on
The switching conditions are:
The variable display of the identification information performed in response to the establishment of the first variable condition during the specific gaming state may be established based on the first count value, which is one of the count values,
The variable display of the identification information performed in response to the establishment of the second variation condition during the specific gaming state may be established in response to the second count value, which is the count value different from the first count value. Yes,
In the specific gaming state that is set in response to the end of the jackpot game, the established count value may be larger than in the specific gaming state that is set in response to stopping and displaying the identification information in the non-specific manner. It is characterized by

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decline in gaming interest.

1 is a perspective view of a pachinko game machine according to a basic embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of a game board unit. (A) is a front view illustrating the standby state of the movable plate body, (B) is a front view illustrating the moving state of the movable plate body, and (C) is a front view illustrating the rotating state of the movable plate body. It is a front view of display devices. 1 is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a basic embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the game control board side. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the production control board side. (A) is a table showing general map related determination information, and (B) is a table showing special pattern related determination information. (A) is a hit determination table, (B) is a regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table, and (C) is an auxiliary game control table. (A) is a jackpot determination table, (B) is a jackpot symbol type determination table, and (C) is a reach determination table. It is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table. It is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. This is a first look-ahead determination table. This is a second look-ahead determination table. (A) is a jackpot game control table, and (B) is a game state setting table. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a demo video, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a setting screen. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a first normal background image, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a second normal background image, and (C) is a diagram showing an example of a third normal background image. FIG. 3D is a diagram showing an example of a background image for probability variation, and FIG. 3E is a diagram showing an example of a background image for time saving. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot opening performance, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a round performance, and (C) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot ending performance. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a production pattern, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a production pattern display area. It is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol variation effect with no reach. It is a diagram showing an example from the start of the special figure variation performance until reaching the reach. It is a figure showing an example of N reach. It is a figure showing an example of L reach. It is a figure showing an example of L reach, and is a continuation of Drawing 23. It is a figure showing an example of SP reach. 26 is a diagram showing an example of SP reach, and is a continuation of FIG. 25. FIG. FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating an example of SP reach, and is a continuation of FIG. 26. It is a figure showing an example of a movable object production. It is a figure showing an example of operation performance. It is a diagram showing an example of a hold performance. It is a figure showing an example of a pending icon change notice. It is a figure showing an example of a pending icon change notice. It is a flowchart of game control main processing. It is a flowchart of game control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of sensor detection processing. 36 is a flowchart of sensor detection processing, and is a diagram continuing from FIG. 35. FIG. It is a flowchart of normal operation processing. It is a flowchart of special operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol standby processing. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol confirmation processing. It is a flowchart of production control main processing. It is a flowchart of 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 10ms timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing. 47 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing, and is a diagram continuing from FIG. 46. FIG. (A) is the special pattern 1 jackpot determination table according to the first embodiment, (B) is the special pattern 2 jackpot determination table according to the first embodiment, and (C) is the losing pattern according to the first embodiment. This is a type determination table. (A) is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for a non-time-saving state according to the first embodiment, and (B) is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for a time-saving state according to the first embodiment. (A) is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state according to the first embodiment, and (B) is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the first time saving state according to the first embodiment. . (A) is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the second time-saving state according to the first embodiment, and (B) is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the third time-saving state according to the first embodiment. be. (A) is a game state setting table for non-time saving small winning symbol stop display according to the first embodiment, (B) is a gaming state setting table for time saving small winning symbol stop display according to the first embodiment, ( C) is a game state setting table for non-time-saving loss symbol stop display according to the first embodiment, and (D) is a game state setting table for time-saving loss symbol stop display according to the first embodiment. It is a small winning game control table according to the first embodiment. 7 is a flowchart of special operation processing according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart of special figure 1 judgment processing concerning a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination process according to the first embodiment. It is a flow chart of special figure 2 judgment processing concerning a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart of the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process according to the first embodiment. It is a flowchart of special symbol confirmation processing according to the first embodiment. It is a diagram showing a state in which a performance is performed in a time-saving performance mode according to the first embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating how an effect is performed in the super chance mode according to the first embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating how a performance is performed in a short chance mode according to the first embodiment. It is a diagram showing a game flow according to the first embodiment. (A) is a hit determination table according to the second embodiment, (B) is a regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table according to the second embodiment, and (C) is an auxiliary game control table according to the second embodiment. be. It is a diagram showing a game flow according to a second embodiment. In the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used in the time saving state after the stop display of the small winning symbol, the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol B, and the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol C according to the third embodiment. be. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 variation pattern determination processing concerning a 3rd embodiment. (A) is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the third time-saving state (number of special figure variations 1 to 10) according to the fourth embodiment, and (B) is a table for the third time-saving state according to the fourth embodiment. (Special figure variation number of times 11 to 30) This is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table. It is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the third time saving state (special figure variation number of times 31 to 50) according to the fourth embodiment. (A) is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the third time-saving state (number of special figure variations 1 to 5) according to the fourth embodiment, and (B) is a table for the third time-saving state according to the fourth embodiment. (Special figure variation number of times 6 to 40) is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table, (C) is a special figure 2 variation pattern for the third time saving state (special figure variation number of times 41 to 50) according to the fourth embodiment This is a judgment table. It is a flowchart of the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table selection process for the time saving state concerning 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart of the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table selection process for the 3rd time saving state based on 4th Embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating a state in which a performance including a first performance button operation promotion performance is performed in a short chance mode according to the fourth embodiment. (A) is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state (special figure variation number of times 1 to 5) after the third time saving state according to the fifth embodiment, and (B) is a table for determining the special figure 1 variation pattern according to the fifth embodiment. This is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state (special figure variation number of times 6 to 8) after the third time saving state. It is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state (special figure variation number of times 9 to 10) after the third time saving state according to the fifth embodiment. (A) is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state (special figure variation number of times 1 to 5) after the third time saving state according to the fifth embodiment, and (B) is a table according to the fifth embodiment. This is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state (special figure variation number of times 6 to 10) after the third time saving state. It is a flowchart of special figure 1 variation pattern determination table selection processing for non-time-saving states according to a fifth embodiment. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table selection processing for non-time-saving states according to a fifth embodiment. It is a flowchart of special symbol confirmation processing according to a fifth embodiment. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table selection processing for the 3rd time saving state concerning a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart of special symbol determination processing according to the sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table selection processing for non-time-saving states according to a seventh embodiment. It is a flowchart of special symbol confirmation processing according to a seventh embodiment.

<Basic embodiment>
First, a basic embodiment of the present invention, which is the premise of the characteristic parts of the gaming machine of the present invention, will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. In each referenced figure, the same parts are given the same reference numerals, and overlapping explanations regarding the same parts will be omitted in principle. In addition, in the following, in order to simplify the description, by writing a symbol or code that refers to information, a signal, a physical quantity, a member, etc., the name of the information, signal, physical quantity, member, etc. for the symbol or code will be omitted or abbreviated. Sometimes.

1. Mechanical Configuration of Gaming Machine Pachinko gaming machine PY1, which is a basic embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention, will be described. First, the mechanical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be explained using FIGS. 1 to 4. In the following description, the horizontal, vertical, and vertical directions of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 refer to the horizontal, vertical, and vertical directions (as viewed from the front) for the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Furthermore, "front" refers to the direction from the pachinko machine PY1 approaching the player facing the pachinko machine PY1, and "backward" refers to the direction approaching the pachinko machine PY1 from the player facing the pachinko machine PY1. ,explain.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko game machine PY1 includes a game board unit YU including a game board 1, and a game machine frame 2 housing the game board unit YU inside. The gaming machine frame 2 includes a frame-shaped outer frame 21 that is fixed to the gaming parlor, an inner frame 22 that is attached to the outer frame 21 and to which the game board unit YU is attached, and a front frame that is rotatably supported by the inner frame 22. A door 23 is provided.

The outer circumferential shapes of the outer frame 21, the inner frame 22, and the front door 23 when viewed from the front are approximately the same. An inner frame 22 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 21.

The front door 23 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 22. The front door 23 includes a frame-shaped front frame 23m having a large substantially vertically rectangular opening formed in the center thereof, and a transparent plate 23t fitted into the opening. When the front door 23 is closed, the game board 1 included in the game board unit YU and the transparent plate 23t face each other. The transparent plate 23t is a transparent synthetic resin plate formed into a substantially vertically long rectangular shape. Therefore, when the pachinko game machine PY1 is installed in a game parlor, a player in front of the pachinko game machine PY1 cannot visually recognize the game area 6 formed on the front side of the game board 1 through the transparent plate 23t. can. Note that a transparent glass plate may be used as the transparent plate 23t instead of the transparent synthetic resin plate. It is sufficient if the gaming area 6 can be viewed from the front of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 through the transparent plate 23t.

A handle 72k that can be rotated to fire a game ball is provided at the lower right portion of the front surface of the front frame 23m. The amount by which the handle 72k is operated (rotation angle) is associated with the magnitude of the force applied to the game ball (shooting strength) to cause the game ball to fire. Therefore, the game ball is fired with a firing intensity that corresponds to the rotational operation of the handle 72k.

Further, at the lower part of the front surface of the front frame 23m, an upper plate 34 that largely protrudes forward and a lower plate 35 arranged directly below the upper plate 34 are provided. At the center of the front side of the upper plate 34, a first effect button 40k that can be pressed downward is provided. The operating portion of the first performance button 40k that visibly protrudes from the upper surface of the upper plate 34 is shaped into a hemispherical shape. Further, on the rear side of the upper surface of the upper tray 34, a supply ball storage hole 34A is formed for storing game balls supplied to the handle 72k. Further, on the upper surface of the lower tray 35, a surplus ball storage hole 35A is provided for storing surplus game balls that cannot be accommodated in the supply ball storage hole 34A.

Furthermore, an upper decorative body 31, a right decorative body 32, and a left decorative body 33 that protrude forward are provided above, on the right side, and on the left side of the transparent plate 23t on the front surface of the front frame 23m. On the bottom surface of the upper decorative body 31, a pair of two speakers 52 capable of outputting sound, specifically a speaker 52L arranged on the left side and a speaker 52R arranged on the right side, are arranged facing downward and arranged in the left and right direction. They are placed side by side at a distance. Further, a second effect button 41k that can be pressed downward is provided at the lower part of the right side decorative body 32. The operation part of the second performance button 41k is shaped like a rod. Furthermore, a frame lamp 53 capable of emitting light is provided from the right side decorative body 32 to the right front portion of the upper plate 34 and from the left side decorative body 33 to the front left portion of the upper plate 34.

Note that the positions and numbers of members and devices provided in the gaming machine frame 2 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Next, the game board unit YU will be explained using FIG. 2 in addition to FIG. 1. The game board unit YU includes a game board 1 and a board effect unit EU attached to the back of the game board 1. First, the game board 1 will be explained. The game board 1 is made of a transparent synthetic resin board. An opening 1A is formed approximately in the center of the game board 1 and is approximately circular when viewed from the front.

On the front surface of the game board 1, a substantially ring-shaped center decoration body 61 is formed to protrude forward along the opening 1A. Further, on the outside of the center decoration body 61, there is an outer rail 62 formed in a substantially ring shape so as to largely surround the center decoration body 61, and an outer rail 62 between the left side portion of the outer rail 62 and the center decoration body 61. 62 and a curved inner rail 63 substantially parallel to the center decorative body 61.

On the front surface of the game board 1, an area surrounded by the center decoration body 61, the outer rail 62, the inner rail 63, etc. forms the game area 6. That is, the front surface of the game board 1 is divided into the game area 6 and other areas by the center decoration body 61, the outer rail 62, and the inner rail 63. Further, the area surrounded by the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 63 forms a firing area 7 through which the fired game balls can pass to head toward the gaming area 6.

The game area 6 is an area into which game balls fired by operating the handle 72k can flow down, and is provided for playing games in the pachinko game machine PY1. Note that a large number of game nails (not shown) are provided protruding from the game area 6. The game nails are used to properly control game balls that enter the game area 6 and flow down the game area 6 into the general prize opening 10, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, the gate 13, the big winning opening 14, etc. It constitutes a route that leads to.

A general winning device 10D is provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area 6. In the general winning device 10D, a general winning opening 10 is formed so that a game ball can be entered. When the game balls enter the general winning hole 10, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game ball that entered the general winning hole 10 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

Further, a first starting winning device 11D is provided directly below the center of the center decoration body 61 in the gaming area 6. The first starting winning device 11D has a first starting opening 11 formed into which a game ball can enter. The first starting winning device 11D has a non-operating structure. Therefore, the ease with which the game ball enters the first starting port 11 remains constant (unchanged). When the game balls enter the first starting port 11, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game ball that entered the first starting port 11 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

Note that a warp portion 61w is formed from the left side to the lower end of the center decoration body 61 to allow the game ball to pass therethrough. An entrance to the warp portion 61w is formed on the left side of the center decorative body 61. The game ball that has entered the warp section 61w passes through the inside of the warp section 61w and exits from the exit. A stage 61s on which a game ball can roll is provided near the exit of the warp section 61w and on the upper surface of the lower end of the center decorative body 61. A downward guide portion 61y that guides the game ball downward is provided at the tip of the stage 61s. A first starting port 11 is provided directly below this downward guide portion 61y.

Directly below the first starting port 11 in the gaming area 6, a second starting winning device (so-called "electric chew") 12D is provided. The electric chew 12D is formed with a second starting port 12 that can be changed into a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter and an open state in which a game ball can enter. The second starting port 12 takes a closed mode and an open mode by an electric tube opening/closing member 12k included in the electric tube 12D. That is, the second starting port 12 is opened and closed by the operation of the electric chew opening/closing member 12k.

The electric chew opening/closing member 12k is a substantially L-shaped member when viewed from the front, and normally closes the second starting port 12. The electric chew opening/closing member 12k can protrude forward from the retracted state in which the front end surface is flush with the gaming area 6. When the electric chew opening/closing member 12k protrudes forward, the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is in a state of protruding perpendicularly to the gaming area 6, and the second starting port 12 is opened to allow entry of a ball. Specifically, the vertical portion erected at the left end of the horizontal portion of the electric chew opening/closing member 12k receives the game ball, and is guided from the horizontal portion to the second starting port 12.

In this way, the game ball can enter the second starting port 12 only when the electric chew opening/closing member 12k is in the open state. When the game balls enter the second starting port 12, a predetermined number (for example, two) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game ball that entered the second starting port 12 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

Further, a gate 13 is provided on the right side of the center decorative body 61. The gate 13 is configured to allow game balls to pass through. Even if the game ball passes through the gate 13, the prize ball is not paid out. Note that the game ball that has passed through the gate 13 flows down the game area 6 as it is.

On the right side of the first starting winning device 11D in the gaming area 6 and on the downstream side of the gate 13, a big winning device 14D is provided. The grand prize winning device 14D is formed with a grand prize opening 14 that can be changed into a closed mode in which a game ball cannot enter and an open mode in which a game ball can enter. The big prize opening 14 takes a closed mode and an open mode by an AT opening/closing member 14k included in the big winning device 14D. That is, the big prize opening 14 is opened and closed by the operation of the AT opening/closing member 14k.

The AT opening/closing member 14k is a movable member made of a flat plate having a generally horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and normally closes the big prize opening 14. A horizontal rotating shaft is provided at the lower end of the AT opening/closing member 14k. The AT opening/closing member 14k can be rotated approximately 90 degrees around its rotation axis so that its upper end is tilted forward. When the AT opening/closing member 14k rotates, the AT opening/closing member 14k comes into a state of protruding perpendicularly to the gaming area 6, and the big prize opening 14 is opened to allow entry of a ball.

In this way, the game ball can enter the big prize opening 14 only when the AT opening/closing member 14k is in the open state. When the game ball enters the big winning hole 14, a predetermined number (one in the first embodiment) of the game ball is paid out as a prize ball. In addition, the game ball that entered the big prize opening 14 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

Further, below the big winning device 14D in the gaming area 6, the upper surface thereof is formed diagonally downward to the left, and a guiding path 64 for guiding the game ball to the second starting port 12 is provided in the gaming area 6 (the front surface of the gaming board 1). It is provided so as to protrude forward from the front. Note that the game ball rolling on the upper surface of the guide path 64 can flow down toward the second starting port 12, but basically cannot enter the first starting port 11.

In addition, the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 11, the second starting port 12, the big winning port 14, and the general winning port 10, and the passage of the gaming ball through the gate 13 are collectively described as the first starting port 11, They are collectively referred to as "winning" to the second starting opening 12, the big winning opening 14, the general winning opening 10, and the gate 13.

By the way, the game area 6 in which the game ball can flow down can be divided into a left game area 6A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction, and a right game area 6B on the right side. The manner in which the handle 72k is operated to launch the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 6A is referred to as "left-handed hitting". On the other hand, the manner in which the handle 72k is operated to shoot the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 6B is referred to as "right-handed hitting".

In the gaming area 6, the flow path through which the game ball can flow down when the game ball is fired with left-hand hitting is called the first flow path R1, and the game ball can flow down when the game ball is fired with right-hand hitting. This flow path is referred to as a second flow path R2. The first passage R1 and the second passage R2 are also constituted by a large number of game nails (not shown).

A first starting port 11 and two general winning ports 10 are provided on the first flow path R1. Therefore, the player can aim to win a prize in the first starting opening 11 or the general winning opening 10 by shooting the game ball so as to flow down the first channel R1 by hitting the ball to the left. On the other hand, a second starting port 12, a gate 13, and a big winning port 14 are provided on the second flow path R2. Therefore, the player can aim to win a prize in the gate 13, the second starting opening 12, or the big prize opening 14 by firing the game ball so as to flow down the second flow path R2 by hitting the ball to the right.

In addition, at approximately the bottom of the gaming area 6, two out ports 19 are provided for discharging game balls that are hit into the gaming area 6 but do not win in any of the winning holes to the outside of the gaming area 6. There is. Further, the number of prize balls that are won in each winning hole can be set as appropriate.

Next, the board effect unit EU attached to the back of the game board 1 will be explained. The board effect unit EU is a unit made up of a plurality of devices that mainly perform effects. An image display device 50 and a board moving device 55 are attached to the board presentation unit EU.

The image display device 50 is configured with a 20-inch 3D liquid crystal display, and includes a display section 50a capable of displaying 3D images. The image display device 50 is placed several centimeters behind the game board 1.

The board movable device 55 includes an operable board movable body 55k. The platen movable body 55k includes a horizontally long plate-shaped elevating member 55k2 maintained in a horizontal state, and a substantially elliptical rotating member 55k1 provided at the center of the elevating member 55k2 in the left-right direction. The board movable body 55k is arranged between the game board 1 and the image display device 50. In the standby state where the board movable body 55k is placed in the initial position, the lower end portion of the board movable body 55k, specifically the lower end portion of the rotating member 55k1, is slightly downwardly moved from the upper end of the opening 1A of the game board 1. positioned. That is, the board movable body 55k is arranged so that in the standby state, only a part of the lower end of the rotating member 55k1 is visible to the player, and the majority is invisible to the player (see FIG. 3(A)).

Then, the movable plate 55k can be lowered as a whole from the initial position to a predetermined operating position, and raised from the operating position to return to the initial position (see FIG. 3(B)). The predetermined operating position is a position where the platen movable body 55k is located approximately at the center of the opening 1A when viewed from the front. Here, the predetermined work position can be set as appropriate, and may be a position where the movable plate 55k is located above or below the approximate center of the opening 1A when viewed from the front. good.

Further, the rotating member 55k1 can rotate clockwise and counterclockwise when viewed from the front about a rotating shaft formed in the front-rear direction at its center (see FIG. 3(C)). Note that the rotational movement of the rotating member 55k1 can be performed when the movable platen body 55k moves from the standby position to the operating position, while being held at the operating position, and when moving from the operating position to the standby position.

Note that the positions and numbers of members and devices provided in the game board unit YU can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Next, a description will be given of the display devices 8 disposed to the right of approximately the center in the vertical direction of the game area 6 formed on the front surface of the game board 1 (the part other than the game area 6). As shown in FIG. 4, the displays 8 include a special pattern 1 display 81a that variably displays a first special pattern (hereinafter referred to as "special pattern 1"), a second special pattern (hereinafter referred to as "special pattern 2") ''), and a regular symbol display 82 that variably displays a regular symbol (hereinafter referred to as "common symbol"). In addition, the display devices 8 include a special figure 1 holding display 83a that displays the number of special drawings 1 held, which will be described later, and a special drawing 2 holding display 83b, which displays the number of special drawings 2 holding, which will be described later. .

The variable display of the special figure 1 is executed when the special figure 1 lottery is carried out triggered by the winning of a game ball in the first starting hole 11. Further, the variable display of the special figure 2 is executed when the special figure 2 lottery is held triggered by the winning of a game ball into the second starting hole 12. The special drawing 1 lottery and the special drawing 2 drawing will be described later. In addition, in the following explanation, special map 1 and special map 2 will be collectively referred to as "special map", and special map 1 lottery and special map 2 lottery will be collectively referred to as "special map lottery". In addition, the special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b are collectively referred to as the "special figure display 81." Furthermore, the special figure 1 reservation display 83a and the special figure 2 reservation display 83b are collectively referred to as the "special figure reservation display 83."

The variable display of the special figure notifies the result of the special figure lottery. In the variable display of the special figure, the special figure is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped. The special figure that is stopped and displayed (stopped special figure) is identification information representing the result of the special figure lottery derived as the display result of the variable display. When the stopped and displayed special figure is a predetermined specific special figure, a jackpot game with opening of the jackpot 14 is performed.

The special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b are each composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side. The lighting mode of the special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b represents the special figure according to the result of the special figure lottery, that is, the result of the special figure lottery. For example, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a jackpot, the final result will be "□□■■□□■■" (□: lit, ■: off), 1st, 2nd, 5th, 6th from the left. An LED lights up. This lighting mode is a jackpot symbol and represents a jackpot. In addition, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a loss, only the LED on the far right lights up as "■■■■■■■□". This lighting mode is a losing pattern and represents a losing pattern. Note that the lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the special drawing lottery is not limited and can be set as appropriate. Therefore, for example, all the LEDs may be turned off as a losing symbol.

Furthermore, in the variable display of the special figure, the special figure is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined variable time before the special figure is stopped and displayed. The manner in which the special figure is displayed in a variable manner is, for example, a manner in which each LED lights up so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. Note that the mode of the variable display is not particularly limited, and may be set as appropriate, such as all the LEDs blinking at once unless each LED is displayed in a stopped state (lit display in a specific mode).

By the way, in the pachinko game machine PY1, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, the special drawing lottery and the variable display of the special drawing may not be performed immediately. Specifically, this is the case when a game ball enters the first starting hole 11 or the second starting hole 12 during execution of variable display of special figures or during execution of a jackpot game. In this case, the special drawing lottery and the variable display of the special drawing are suspended based on the winning prize. This reserved special drawing drawing and the variable display of the special drawing are called "special drawing reservation."

The special drawing reservation includes the special drawing 1 drawing that was held based on the prize won in the first starting opening 11, and "special drawing 1 pending" which represents the variable display of the special drawing 1, and the winning winning in the second starting opening 12. There is a special drawing 2 lottery held based on , and a "special drawing 2 pending" representing a variable display of special drawing 2. Then, the special figure 1 pending display 83a displays the number of special figure 1 pending, that is, the number of reserved special figure 1 drawings and variable displays of special figure 1. On the other hand, the special figure 2 pending display 83b displays the number of special figure 2 reservations, that is, the number of reserved special figure 2 drawings and the number of variable displays of special figure 2.

It is also possible to set an upper limit on the number of special figure 1 reservations and the number of special figure 2 reservations, or not to set them. In addition, when setting upper limits to the number of special symbols 1 and 2 reserved, the number of special symbols 1 and 2 can be the same or different. In addition, in the basic embodiment, it is assumed that the upper limit of the number of special drawings 1 and the number of special drawings 2 being held is set to "4".

Each of the special figure 1 hold indicator 83a and the special figure 2 hold indicator 83b is composed of four LEDs, and the special figure is displayed by lighting up the LEDs for the number of special figure 1 hold and special figure 2 hold. Displays the number of Figure 1 reservations and Special Figure 2 reservations. In addition, in the following, the number of special drawings 1 reserved is referred to as "the number of special symbols 1 reserved (U1)", and the number of special symbols 2 reserved is referred to as "the number of special symbols 2 reserved (U2)". In addition, the "number of reserved special drawings 1" and "number of reserved special drawings 2" are collectively referred to as the "number of reserved special drawings." Furthermore, the "special figure 1 holding display 83a" and the "special drawing 2 holding display 83b" are collectively referred to as the "special drawing holding display 83."

Further, the variable display of the common symbol is executed when a common symbol lottery is held triggered by the winning of a game ball at the gate 13. The variable display of the common map notifies the result of the common map lottery. In the variable display of a general map, the general map is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped. The stationary displayed ordinary map (stopped ordinary map) is identification information representing the result of the ordinary map lottery drawn as a display result of the variable display. When the stopped and displayed general figure is a predetermined specific ordinary figure, an auxiliary game accompanied by opening of the second starting port 12 is performed.

The general figure display 82 is composed of, for example, two LEDs. The lighting mode of the general map display device 82 represents the general map corresponding to the result of the general map lottery, that is, the result of the general map lottery. If the result of the general lottery is a win, both LEDs will eventually light up as "□□" (□: lit, ■: off). This lighting mode is a winning symbol and represents a win. Furthermore, if the result of the general drawing lottery is a loss, only the right LED will finally light up, such as "■□". This lighting mode is a losing pattern and represents a losing pattern. Note that the lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the general drawing lottery is not limited and can be set as appropriate. For example, a mode may be adopted in which all the LEDs are turned off as a losing symbol.

Further, before the regular map is stopped and displayed, the regular map is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined variable time. In the basic embodiment, the mode of fluctuating display of the common map is such that both LEDs are lit alternately. Note that the mode of the fluctuating display of the general map is not particularly limited, and may be set as appropriate, such as all the LEDs flashing at once if each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lit display in a specific mode). .

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be explained based on FIGS. 5 to 7. As shown in FIG. 5, on the back side of the pachinko game machine PY1, there is a game control board 100 that performs control (progress of the game) regarding games that can earn gaming profits, and a Power is supplied to the production control board 120 that controls the production, the image control board 140 that controls images, the payout control board 170 that controls the payout of game balls, and each of the boards 100, 120, 140, and 170. A power supply board 190 is attached.

A power switch 191 is connected to the power supply board 190. The ON/OFF operation of the power switch 191 switches the power on/off.

As shown in FIG. 6, the game control board 100 is equipped with a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as "game control microcomputer") 101 that controls the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine PY1 according to a program. Therefore, the game control board 100 can be positioned as a game control section that controls games. In addition, games in which gaming profits can be obtained that are controlled by the game control board 100 include special drawing lottery, variable display of special drawings, jackpot games, game state setting described later, general drawing lottery, and variable display of normal drawings. , auxiliary games, etc.

The game control microcomputer 101 includes a game ROM (Read Only Memory) 103 that stores programs, tables, etc. for controlling the progress of the game, a game RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 used as a work memory, and a game RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 that is used as a work memory. A gaming CPU (Central Processing Unit) 102 that executes a program stored in a ROM 103 is included.

The game ROM 103 stores programs for performing game control main processing, game control side timer interrupt processing, etc., which will be described later. In addition, the gaming ROM 103 includes a jackpot determination table, a jackpot symbol type determination table, a reach determination table, a special pattern variation pattern determination table, a look-ahead determination table, a jackpot game control table, a game state setting table, a hit determination table, and an auxiliary hit determination table, which will be described later. Game control tables, etc. are stored. Note that the gaming ROM 103 may be externally attached.

Further, the gaming RAM 104 is provided with a special figure reservation storage section 105. Here, the special figure reservation storage section 105 will be explained. As mentioned above, when a game ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, special drawings can be reserved, but if special drawings can be reserved, that is, if the number of special symbols reserved is When the upper limit has not been reached, determination information consisting of various random numbers for performing a special drawing lottery etc. is obtained based on this winning prize. Then, this determination information is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage section 105 as a special figure reservation. In addition, in the following, the judgment information obtained by winning the game ball into the first starting port 11 is referred to as "special map 1 related judgment information", and the judgment information obtained by winning the game ball into the second starting port 12. The determination information that is determined is referred to as "special figure 2 related determination information." In addition, the special figure 1 related determination information and the special figure 2 related determination information are collectively referred to as "special figure related determination information."

Then, the special figure 1 related determination information is stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a in the special figure reservation storage section 105 as the special figure 1 reservation. On the other hand, the special figure 2 related determination information is stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b in the special figure reservation storage section 105 as the special figure 2 reservation. The number of special figure 1 related determination information that can be stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a, that is, the upper limit of the number of special figure 1 reservations is set to "4". Further, the number of special figure 2 related determination information that can be stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b, that is, the upper limit of the number of special figure 2 reservations is set to "4".

Further, various sensors and solenoids are connected to the game control board 100 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Therefore, signals output from various sensors are input to the game control board 100. Moreover, the game control board 100 outputs signals to various actuators.

Various sensors connected to the game control board 100 include a general winning opening sensor 10a, a first starting opening sensor 11a, a second starting opening sensor 12a, a gate sensor 13a, and a big winning opening sensor 14a. .

The general winning hole sensor 10a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the general winning hole 10. The first starting port sensor 11a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first starting port 11. The second starting port sensor 12a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second starting port 12. The gate sensor 13a detects the game ball that has passed through the gate 13. The big winning hole sensor 14a detects the game ball that has entered the big winning hole 14.

Further, various actuators connected to the game control board 100 include an electric chew solenoid 12s and an AT solenoid 14s. The electric chew solenoid 12s drives the electric chew opening/closing member 12k of the electric chew 12D. The AT solenoid 14s drives the AT opening/closing member 14k of the big winning device 14D.

In addition, the type and number of sensors connected to the game control board 100 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game. Further, the type and number of actuators connected to the game control board 100 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

Further, the game control board 100 is connected to display devices 8 (a special figure display 81, a regular figure display 82, and a special figure pending display 83). Display control of these displays 8 is performed by a game control microcomputer 101.

Further, the game control board 100 transmits various commands to the payout control board 170, and receives signals from the payout control board 170 for payout monitoring. A card unit CU and a payout device 73 are connected to the payout control board 170, and a firing device 72 is also connected thereto. Further, the card unit CU is a device that is installed adjacent to the pachinko game machine PY1 and allows ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card.

The payout control board 170 drives the payout motor 73m of the payout device 73 to pay out prize balls and rental balls based on signals from the game control microcomputer 101 and signals from the connected card unit CU. The prize balls and rental balls that are paid out are detected by a payout sensor 73a for counting them.

Further, the firing device 72 is a device that fires game balls. The handle 72k constitutes an operation section or an input section that receives an operation for causing the shooting device 72 to shoot a game ball, and is included in the shooting device 72. The handle 72k is provided with a touch switch 72a that can detect a contact of a person such as a player with the handle 72k. When the player operates the handle 72k, the touch switch 72a detects the player's contact with the handle 72k, and outputs a detection signal to the payout control board 170 via the release control circuit 175.

Furthermore, a firing volume knob 72b that can detect the rotation angle (operation amount) of the handle 72k is connected to the handle 72k. The firing device 72 drives the firing motor 72m so that the game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 72k detected by the firing volume knob 72b. In the pachinko game machine PY1, one game ball is fired approximately every 0.6 seconds while the rotational operation of the handle 72k is maintained.

Further, the game control board 100 transmits various commands including information regarding the game to the performance control board 120 in accordance with the progress of the game. The production control board 120 can grasp the progress of the game (game control content) by the game control board 100 based on various commands sent from the game control board 100.

The connection between the game control board 100 and the production control board 120 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only the transmission of signals from the game control board 100 to the production control board 120. That is, between the game control board 100 and the performance control board 120, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode), not shown, is interposed as a communication direction regulating means.

As shown in FIG. 7, the performance control board 120 is equipped with a performance control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as "performance control microcomputer") 121 that controls the performance of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to a program. The production control board 120 can be positioned as a production control unit that controls production, together with an image control board 140, an audio control circuit 161, and a sub-drive board 162, which will be described later. However, the performance control section includes at least a performance control board 120, and performs game performance, customer waiting performance, and operation promotion using performance devices (image display device 50, speaker 52, frame lamp 53, board movable body 55k, etc.). It is sufficient if it is possible to control the presentation.

The performances that are controlled by the performance control board 120 include game performances (special figure fluctuation performances, hold performances, jackpot game performances, etc.), customer waiting performances, and operations of the first performance button 40k and the second performance button 41k. It includes operation promotion effects that encourage operation during the valid period (operation valid period).

The performance control microcomputer 121 includes a performance ROM 123 that stores a program for controlling the performance as the game progresses by the game control board 100, a performance RAM 124 used as a work memory, and a performance ROM 123 that stores programs. It includes a presentation CPU 122 that executes a program.

The production ROM 123 stores programs for performing production control main processing, reception interrupt processing, 1ms timer interrupt processing, 10ms timer interrupt processing, etc., which will be described later. Note that the performance ROM 123 may be externally attached.

The performance RAM 124 includes a starting winning command suspension storage section 125 that stores starting winning commands that will be described later, a symbol designation command storage section 126 that stores symbol designation commands that will be described later, and a special symbol that stores special symbol fluctuation start commands that will be described later. A fluctuation start command storage section 127 is provided.

Further, an image control board 140 is connected to the effect control board 120. The performance control microcomputer 121 of the performance control board 120 controls the display of the image display device 50 on the image control board 140 based on commands received from the game control board 100, that is, according to the progress of the game by the game control board 100. Have them do it. Note that the connection between the production control board 120 and the image control board 140 allows both the transmission of signals from the production control board 120 to the image control board 140 and the transmission of signals from the image control board 140 to the production control board 120. This is a two-way communication connection.

The image control board 140 includes an image ROM 142 that stores programs for image control, an image RAM 143 used as a work memory, and an image CPU 141 that executes the programs stored in the image ROM 142. . The image control board 140 also includes a CGROM (Character Generator Read Only Memory) 145 that stores image data to be displayed on the image display device 50, and a VRAM (Video Memory) that is used to expand the image data stored in the CGROM 145. Random Access Memory) 146 and VDP (Video Display Processor) 144. All or a portion of these electronic components may be configured in one chip.

The CGROM 145 stores, for example, image data (still image data and video data, specifically characters, items, designs, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc.) for displaying images displayed on the image display device 50. (including designs) and image data such as background images) are stored.

The VDP 144 reads image data from the CGROM 145 and develops it in a development area in the VRAM 146 in accordance with a display list created by the image CPU 141 based on instructions from the performance control microcomputer 121. Then, the expanded image data is appropriately combined and an image is drawn in the frame buffer in the VRAM 146. The image drawn in the frame buffer is then output to the image display device 50 as an RGB signal. As a result, various effect images are displayed on the display section 50a.

Note that the display list is composed of a group of commands for instructing execution of drawing in units of frames. The display list includes information on various parameters such as the type of image to be drawn, the position at which the image is drawn, display priority, display magnification, and image transmittance.

In addition, the performance control microcomputer 121 outputs audio, music, and music from the speaker 52 via the audio control circuit 161 based on commands received from the game control board 100, that is, according to the progress of the game by the game control board 100. Output sound effects, etc.

Audio data such as audio output from the speaker 52 is stored in the performance ROM 123 of the performance control board 120. Note that the audio control circuit 161 may be configured with a board and a CPU may be mounted thereon. In this case, the CPU may be caused to perform voice control. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board and audio data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 52 may be connected to the image control board 140 and the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 may be caused to perform audio control. Furthermore, in this case, the audio data may be stored in the image ROM 142 of the image control board 140.

Further, various sensors serving as input units and various actuators serving as drive sources are connected to the production control board 120 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Signals output from various sensors are input to the production control board 120. Moreover, the production control board 120 outputs signals to various actuators.

Various switches connected to the performance control board 120 include a first performance button sensor 40a and a second performance button sensor 41a. The first performance button sensor 40a detects that the first performance button 40k is pressed. The second performance button sensor 41a detects that the second performance button 41k is pressed. When the first performance button sensor 40a and the second performance button sensor 41a detect that each has been operated, they output a signal to the performance control board 120 according to the detected content.

Note that the type and number of switches connected to the performance control board 120 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game. Further, the type and number of actuators connected to the production control board 120 can be changed as appropriate within a range that does not interfere with the game.

The various actuators connected to the performance control board 120 include a rotating member motor 55m1 and a lifting member motor 55m2. The rotating member motor 55m1 can drive the rotating member 55k1 to rotate the rotating member 55k1. The elevating member motor 55m2 can raise or lower the elevating member 55k2. In detail, the performance control microcomputer 121 creates operation pattern data that determines the operation mode of the rotating member 55k1 and the lifting member 55k2, and controls the operation of the rotating member 55k1 and the lifting member 55k2 via the sub-drive board 162. .

In addition, below, the operation|movement of "the rotating member 55k1 and the elevating member 55k2" may be collectively called "the operation|movement of the board movable body 55k." Furthermore, rotating the rotary member 55k1 and lowering or raising the elevating member 55k2 are also referred to as "rotating, lowering, or raising the movable platen body 55k."

Further, the performance control microcomputer 121 controls the lighting of the frame lamp 53 and the like via the sub-drive board 162 based on commands received from the game control board 100. In detail, the performance control microcomputer 121 creates light emission pattern data (data that determines lighting/extinguishing, emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of the frame lamp 53, and controls the frame lamp 53 according to the light emission pattern data. Control light emission. Note that data stored in the performance ROM 123 of the performance control board 120 is used to create the light emission pattern data.

Note that the sub-drive board 162 may be configured with a board and the CPU may be mounted thereon. In this case, the CPU may control the lighting of the frame lamp 53 and the like and control the operation of the panel movable body 55k. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board and data regarding the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

3. Main games played by the gaming machine Next, main games played by the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be explained using FIGS. 8 to 15.

3-1. Games related to common figures First, games related to common figures will be explained. The pachinko game machine PY1 can execute a regular lottery when the fired game balls pass through the gate 13. When the general drawing lottery is performed, the normal drawing is displayed variably (variably displayed and then stopped) on the general drawing display 82. Here, the regular symbols that are stopped and displayed include winning symbols and losing symbols. In addition, the losing pattern of the regular pattern is also called "losing pattern" to distinguish it from the losing pattern of the special pattern described later.

When the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is executed, and the game related to passing through the gate 13 ends. On the other hand, when the losing common map is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is not performed and the game related to passing through the gate 13 ends. In addition, hereinafter, the fact that the game ball passes through the gate 13 when the variable display of the normal pattern or the auxiliary game is not being played will be referred to as "establishment of the normal pattern fluctuation starting condition."

The pachinko gaming machine PY1 performs a series of games such as variable display of general drawings and auxiliary games based on the general drawing fluctuation start condition being satisfied, obtaining general drawing related determination information, and performing general drawing lottery. I can do it. The acquired ordinary symbol related determination information includes ordinary symbol random numbers, as shown in FIG. 8(A). The normal symbol random number is a random number (judgment information) for making a hit determination. Each random number has an appropriate range.

3-1-1. Win Determination The win determination is a determination for determining whether or not there is a win (whether or not to execute the auxiliary game) using a hit determination table as shown in FIG. 9(A), for example. The hit determination table can be associated with a gaming state that will be described later. When associated with the gaming state, the hit determination table includes a hit determination table used in the non-time saving state (non-time saving hit determination table) and a hit determination table used in the time saving state (time saving hit determination table).

In each hit determination table, determination values of normal symbol random numbers (normal symbol random number determination values) are appropriately distributed to hits and losses that are the results of the hit determination. Therefore, the pachinko game machine PY1 compares the acquired normal symbol random number with the hit determination table to determine whether it is a hit or a loss. If the result of the hit determination is a hit, the winning symbol is stopped and displayed on the variable display of the common symbol. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is a loss, the losing common map is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the common symbol. Note that the winning probability can be changed as appropriate.

3-1-2. Ordinary Figure Fluctuation Pattern Determination/Ordinary Figure Variable Display Ordinary Figure Fluctuation Pattern Judgment is a determination for determining the Ordinary Figure Fluctuation Pattern by using the Ordinary Figure Fluctuation Pattern Determination Table as shown in FIG. 9(B), for example. The ordinary figure fluctuation pattern is identification information regarding predetermined matters related to variable display of ordinary figures, such as ordinary figure fluctuation time.

The regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table can be associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state). When associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state), the regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table includes the regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table (non-time saving regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table) used in the non-time saving state and the regular pattern fluctuation pattern determination table used in the non-time saving state. There is a regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table (time-saving regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table) that is used in the state.

Each ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination table stores one ordinary figure fluctuation pattern, which is the result of ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination, for each ordinary figure to be stopped. In other words, the pachinko game machine PY1 is capable of making the normal pattern fluctuation time different between the non-time saving state and the time saving state. For example, in a non-time-saving state, when a losing regular symbol (losing regular symbol) is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the regular symbol is determined to be a regular symbol fluctuation pattern in which the regular symbol fluctuation time is 30 seconds, and the winning symbol is displayed. Regarding the variable display of common figures in the case of stop display, a common figure fluctuation pattern is determined in which the ordinary figure fluctuation time is 30 seconds. In addition, in the time saving state, for the variable display of common symbols when a losing common symbol is stopped and displayed, a common symbol fluctuation pattern in which the common symbol fluctuation time is 5 seconds is determined, and when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, a common symbol fluctuation pattern is determined. Regarding the variable display, a general pattern fluctuation pattern in which the general pattern fluctuation time is 5 seconds is determined. It should be noted that these general figure fluctuation times can be changed as appropriate.

Then, variable display of the ordinary figure of the ordinary figure fluctuation time associated with the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determined in the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination is performed on the ordinary figure display 82. In this way, by performing the hit determination and the normal pattern variation pattern determination, the normal pattern is variably displayed on the normal pattern display 82.

3-1-3. Auxiliary Game The auxiliary game is a variable display of a common symbol, and is executed when a winning symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) as a display result (result of a common symbol lottery). In the auxiliary game, the electric chew 12D is released.

The elements constituting the auxiliary game (auxiliary game component) include various elements such as the number of times the electric chew 12D is opened and the opening time for each opening. Pachinko game machine PY1 controls the auxiliary game using the auxiliary game control table. The auxiliary game control table stores auxiliary game components. For example, as shown in FIG. 9(C), it is possible to associate the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state) with the auxiliary game control table. That is, it is possible to associate the auxiliary game component with the game state (non-time saving state/time saving state). Note that the specific contents of each element, such as the number of openings and the opening time, can be changed as appropriate.

The pachinko game machine PY1 can make the opening time of the electric chew 12D different between the auxiliary game in the non-time-saving state and the auxiliary game in the time-saving state. For example, in an auxiliary game in a non-time saving state, the electric chew 12D is opened for a first opening time such as 0.2 seconds during which it is difficult for the electric chew 12D to win a game ball. On the other hand, in the auxiliary game in the time saving state, for example, if the game ball is opened twice for 2.5 seconds with a 1.0 second interval (closed) in between, the first opening time is longer than the first opening time, and the game ball enters the electric chew 12D. The electric chew 12D is opened only for the second opening time which is easy to open.

Note that, hereinafter, the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state is also referred to as the "short opening auxiliary game". On the other hand, the auxiliary game in the time saving state is also referred to as the "long opening auxiliary game". In addition, the opening time for each auxiliary game is the total time for that auxiliary game, and for example, it may be opened multiple times in one auxiliary game, such as opening once and then opening again after a closing interval. It may be configured as follows.

3-2. Games Related to Special Figures Next, games related to special figures will be explained. The pachinko game machine PY1 can execute the special drawing 1 lottery when the fired game ball enters the first starting hole 11. When the special figure 1 lottery is carried out, the special figure 1 is displayed variably on the special figure 1 display 81a (stop display after a variable display is performed) to notify the result of the special figure 1 lottery. Here, the special symbols 1 that are stopped and displayed include jackpot symbols and losing symbols. That is, the results of the special drawing 1 lottery include jackpots and losses.

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new gaming state is set, and the game based on the winning prize ends. Furthermore, when the losing symbols are stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not played and the game based on the winning prize ends.

Similarly, the pachinko game machine PY1 can execute the special drawing 2 lottery when the fired game ball enters the second starting hole 12. When the special figure 2 lottery is performed, the special figure 2 is displayed variably (stopped after being displayed variablely) on the special figure 2 display 81b to notify the result of the special figure 2 lottery. Here, the special symbols 2 that are stopped and displayed include jackpot symbols and losing symbols. That is, the result of the special drawing 2 lottery includes a jackpot and a loss.

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new gaming state is set, and the game based on the winning prize ends. Furthermore, when the losing symbols are stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not played, and the game based on the winning prize ends.

In addition, in the following, when a game ball enters the first starting port 11, it is referred to as "establishment of the first starting condition", and when a gaming ball enters the second starting port 12, it is referred to as "establishment of the second starting condition". That's what it means. Further, "the first starting condition is met" and "the second starting condition is met" are collectively referred to as "the starting condition is met." In addition, the losing symbols of the special symbols are also referred to as "losing special symbols" to distinguish them from the losing symbols of the above-mentioned ordinary symbols.

The pachinko game machine PY1 performs a series of games such as variable display of special symbols and a jackpot game based on the establishment of a starting condition, the acquisition of special symbol related determination information, and the performance of a special symbol lottery. Then, in order to perform variable display of the special figure, various determinations are made regarding the special figure related determination information. As shown in FIG. 8(B), the acquired special symbol related determination information includes a special symbol random number, a jackpot symbol type random number, a reach random number, and a special symbol variation pattern random number.

The special symbol random number is a random number (determination information) for determining a jackpot. The jackpot symbol type random number is a random number (judgment information) for determining the jackpot symbol type. The reach random number is a random number (judgment information) for performing reach determination. The special symbol variation pattern random number is a random number (judgment information) for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. Each random number has an appropriate range. Next, each determination made using the special figure related determination information will be explained.

3-2-1. Jackpot Judgment The jackpot judgment is to use a jackpot judgment table to determine whether or not it is a jackpot (whether or not to execute a jackpot game), in other words, whether it is a jackpot or a loss. For example, as shown in FIG. 10(A), the jackpot determination table can be provided in association with a gaming state to be described later. Specifically, the jackpot determination table includes a jackpot determination table used in the normal probability state (hereinafter referred to as "normal probability jackpot determination table") described later, and a jackpot determination table (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot determination table for normal probability") used in the high probability state described later. , "high probability jackpot determination table").

In each jackpot determination table associated with the gaming state, special symbol random number determination values (special symbol random number determination values) are assigned to jackpots and losses that are the results of the jackpot determination. The pachinko game machine PY1 checks the acquired special symbol random number against the jackpot determination table associated with the gaming state to determine whether it is a jackpot or a loss. As shown in FIG. 10(A), the high probability jackpot determination table has more special symbol random number determination values that are determined to be a jackpot than the normal probability jackpot determination table.

It should be noted that the method of allocating the special symbol random number determination value to the jackpot probability and the determination results of various jackpot determinations can be changed as appropriate.

3-2-2. Jackpot symbol type determination Jackpot symbol type determination determines the type of jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol type) using a jackpot symbol type determination table as shown in FIG. 10(B), for example, when the result of jackpot determination is a jackpot. It is to be. It is possible to associate the type of jackpot symbol with the content of the jackpot, in other words, the constituent elements of the jackpot (content advantageous to the player) consisting of gaming benefits given to the player.

The jackpot symbol type determination table shows the type of special symbol that is variably displayed (special symbol 1/special symbol 2), in other words, the winning pattern that is caused by the jackpot symbol type determination (that caused the jackpot symbol type determination) is associated with the type of starting port (first starting port 11/second starting port 12). That is, the jackpot symbol type determination table includes a jackpot symbol type determination table (first jackpot symbol type determination table) used when performing a variable display of special figure 1, and a jackpot symbol type determination table used when performing a variable display of special figure 2. There is a symbol type determination table (second jackpot symbol type determination table).

Multiple types of jackpot symbols can be set. In each jackpot symbol type determination table, a jackpot symbol type random number determination value (jackpot symbol type random number determination value) is assigned to the jackpot symbol type that is the result of the jackpot symbol type determination. Therefore, the pachinko game machine PY1 compares the acquired jackpot symbol type random number with the jackpot symbol type determination table to determine the type of jackpot symbol. In the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type random number determination values are appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols.

The types of the jackpot symbol of special symbol 1 and the jackpot symbol of special symbol 2 can be set as appropriate, but for example, as in the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 10(B), the jackpot symbol of special symbol 1 As such, three types of jackpot symbols are provided: jackpot symbol A, jackpot symbol B, and jackpot symbol C, and three types of jackpot symbols are provided as the jackpot symbol of special pattern 2, jackpot symbol D, jackpot symbol E, and jackpot symbol F. can be provided. Then, like the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 10(B), in the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type random number determination values are appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols. ing. Note that the distribution rate of the jackpot symbol type can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, the types of jackpot symbols can be increased or decreased as appropriate.

3-2-3. Reach Judgment For reach judgment, for example, when the result of jackpot judgment is a loss, use a reach judgment table as shown in FIG. It is to decide.

The reach determination table can be associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state). When associated with a gaming state, for example, the reach determination table includes a reach determination table used in the non-time saving state (non-time saving reach determination table) and a reach determination table used in the time saving state (time saving reach determination table). judgment table).

In each reach determination table, the reach random number determination value (reach random number determination value) is divided into the reach determination results "with reach (reach occurs)" and "without reach (reach does not occur)". There is. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 compares the obtained reach random number with the reach determination table to determine whether there is a reach or no reach (whether or not to generate a reach).

As shown in FIG. 10(C), the number of reach random number determination values that are determined as "reach exists (reach occurs)" can be made different between the non-time-saving reach determination table and the time-saving reach determination table. It is possible. In addition, in the following, the result of reach determination, which is performed on the premise that the result of jackpot determination is "lose", is referred to as "reach with reach" (reach occurs), and "no reach" is referred to as "reach with reach (reach occurs)". This is sometimes referred to as ``no reach failure.''

3-2-4. Special symbol fluctuation pattern determination Special symbol fluctuation pattern determination is performed using special symbol fluctuation pattern determination tables (special symbol fluctuation patterns) as shown in FIGS. The purpose is to determine a variation pattern (special figure variation pattern) of variable display of special figures using a determination table (determination table).

The special figure variation pattern is identification information for identifying predetermined matters regarding the special figure variation time, the so-called "shaku", the production flow (production content) of the special figure variation production described later, etc. In addition, the special figure fluctuation pattern can also include identification information regarding the result of the jackpot determination and the result of the reach determination, in addition to the special figure fluctuation time and the performance flow (performance content) of the special symbol fluctuation performance. In addition, the type and number of special figure fluctuation patterns can be changed as appropriate.

The special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table is based on the type of special symbol (special pattern 1/special pattern 2) that performs variable display that is the target of determination, in other words, the starting opening where the prize was won due to the special pattern fluctuation pattern determination. It is possible to relate to the type (first starting port 11/second starting port 12). That is, the special figure variation pattern judgment table includes a special figure variation pattern judgment table (special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table: Figure 11) used when performing the variable display of special figure 1, and a variable display of special figure 2. There is a special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table: FIG. 12) used when performing this.

Each special figure fluctuation pattern determination table can be associated with a gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state). Specifically, the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table includes a special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table (non-time saving special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table) used in the non-time saving state and a special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table used in the time saving state. There is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table). On the other hand, regarding the special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table, there is also a special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table used in the non-time saving state (special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table for non-time saving) and a special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table used in the time saving state. There is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table).

In addition, each special figure fluctuation pattern determination table associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state) can be further associated with the jackpot determination result and the reach determination result. That is, the non-time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and the time-saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table include one for jackpot, one for loss with reach, and one for loss without reach. Similarly, the non-time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table and the time-saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table include one for jackpots, one for lose with reach, and one for lose without reach.

Furthermore, each special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for no reach and loss associated with the gaming state can also be associated with the number of reserved special figures 1. For example, there is a special pattern 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table for no-reach loss that is used when the number of reserved special symbols 1 (U1) is 0 to 2, and a table that is used when the number of reserved special symbols 1 (U1) is 3 to 4. There is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for no-reach misses. Similarly, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for each reach-less loss associated with the gaming state can also be associated with the special figure 2 pending number. Specifically, there is a special pattern 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table for no-reach loss that is used when the number of special symbols 2 reserved (U2) is 0 to 2, and a special symbol 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table for no-reach loss that is used when the number of special symbols 2 reserved (U2) is 3 to 4. There is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for no-reach misses that is used for.

Then, the special figure display device 81 displays a variation of the special figure of the special figure variation time according to the special figure variation pattern determined by each special figure variation pattern determination. Then, after the variable display of the special pattern, if the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed as the display result of the special pattern variable display (result of the special pattern lottery), the next variable display of the special pattern will not be performed immediately, and the variable display will continue. , a jackpot game is executed.

Furthermore, it is possible to associate each special figure variation pattern with the production flow of the special figure variation production as shown in the third column from the right in the table of FIGS. 11 and 12. Here, typical effects that constitute the effect flow of the special figure variation effect associated with the special figure variation pattern will be explained.

The performances that make up the performance flow of the special figure variation performance include normal variation, reach, normal reach (N reach), long reach (L reach), special reach (SP reach), and battle performance.

Normal fluctuation indicates that the performance symbols that had been stopped and displayed have started to fluctuate, and each of the performance symbols that make up each production symbol has been fluctuated and displayed at such high speed that it is difficult to recognize, suggesting that the variable display of the special symbol has started. It is a performance that In addition, the special symbol fluctuation performance (the part from the start of the variation of the production pattern to the stop of variation) related to the no-reach loss variation, and the part until the reach is established (confirmed) in the special symbol variation production where the reach occurs, usually fluctuates. It may consist of

In N reach, immediately after a reach is established (confirmed) through normal fluctuations, for example, the production symbols that make up the reach are temporarily stopped at the same position for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds), and the remaining one is This is a performance in which the performance symbols slow down and fluctuate at a slower speed than normal fluctuations. The degree of expectation of a jackpot suggested by N reach is higher than normal fluctuations and lower than L reach and SP reach, which will be described later. When the special symbol fluctuation performance ends at N reach, the remaining one performance symbol that fluctuates at that low speed stops. In the case of a loss, the remaining one performance pattern stops at a performance pattern different from the performance pattern that constitutes the reach. If the special symbol fluctuation performance does not end at N reach, the remaining one performance symbol changes again at high speed, and develops (switches) from N reach to L reach and SP reach while maintaining reach.

L reach is a performance that can be executed both in the case of a jackpot and in the case of a loss, and is a performance that suggests whether or not a jackpot gaming state will occur, and suggests that there is a possibility of a jackpot gaming state. Furthermore, L reach is a performance that can be executed after N reach, for example, and is performed for a longer time than N reach, suggesting that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than N reach. Even in L reach, the established reach is maintained, but the effect symbols that make up the reach are reduced and are moved to a predetermined position that does not interfere with the background image than in the case of N reach (for example, the left effect pattern EZ1 described later is With the right effect pattern EZ3 moved to the upper right of the display section 50a (at the upper left of the display section 50a), the background image is switched to the L reach exclusive background image (the L reach exclusive video is played). Note that in L reach, 2DCG animation images are mainly displayed on the display section 50a. The contents of L Reach's production include videos of scenes different from the matches related to SP Reach, which will be described later, such as the main character undergoing special training to learn special moves.

SP reach is a performance that can be executed both in the case of a jackpot and in the case of a loss, and is a performance that suggests whether or not a jackpot gaming state will occur, and suggests that there is a possibility of a jackpot gaming state. Furthermore, SP reach is a performance that can be executed after, for example, N reach, and is performed for a longer time than L reach, suggesting that the expectation of a jackpot is higher than L reach. Even in SP reach, the established reach is maintained, but the effect symbols that make up the reach are reduced and are moved to a predetermined position that does not interfere with the background image than in the case of N reach (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 described later is At the upper left of the display section 50a, with the right effect symbol EZ3 moved to the upper right of the display section 50a, the background image is switched to the SP reach-specific background image (the SP reach-specific video is played). Note that in SP reach, 3DCG images are mainly displayed on the display section 50a. As the content of SP Reach, a video of a match between the team to which the main character belongs and the team to which the rival of the main character belongs is displayed.

The battle performance is, for example, a performance that can be executed after reach in a time-saving state, and is a performance that suggests that the jackpot expectation is higher than the normal fluctuation. Even in battle production, the achieved reach is maintained, but the production symbols that make up the reach are reduced and moved to predetermined positions (for example, the left production symbol EZ1 is at the upper left of the display section 50a, and the right production symbol EZ3 is placed at the upper left of the display section 50a. (upper right corner), the background image will switch to the battle production-specific background image (the battle production-specific video will play). Furthermore, in the battle performance, 3DCG images are mainly displayed on the display section 50a.

In addition, in the "state in which the reach is maintained" in the N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle performance, the performance symbols that constitute the reach in the N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle performance are displayed on the display section 50a. This includes not only a state where it is visible from the display section 50a, but also a state where the effect pattern constituting the reach is difficult or impossible to see from the display section 50a for a predetermined period of time in relation to a dedicated background image. Further, the contents of the normal variation, N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle performance can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, the effects that make up the special figure variation effect are not limited to these, and can be added or reduced as appropriate.

In addition, as shown in the second column from the right of the table in FIGS. 11 and 12, it is possible to give a name to the special pattern variation pattern by associating it with the jackpot determination result and the content of the special pattern variation production. . The special pattern variation pattern related to a jackpot is sometimes collectively referred to as a "jackpot variation", and the special pattern variation pattern related to a loss is sometimes collectively referred to as a "loss variation".

Furthermore, the special pattern variation pattern in which SP reach is performed regardless of the jackpot judgment result is "SP reach variation", the special pattern variation pattern in which L reach is performed is "L reach variation", and the special pattern variation pattern in which N reach is performed is special pattern variation. The special pattern variation pattern where the production ends is sometimes collectively referred to as "N reach variation". In addition, loss fluctuations with reach are sometimes referred to as "loss fluctuations with reach", and loss fluctuations without reach are sometimes collectively referred to as "normal loss fluctuations".

3-2-5. Pre-reading Judgment Before making a jackpot judgment, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform a pre-reading judgment based on the acquired special figure-related judgment information using a pre-reading judgment table as shown in FIGS. 13 to 14, for example. be. The look-ahead determination table is based on the type of starting opening (first starting opening 11/second starting opening 12) related to the starting winning, in other words, the type of special figure that is variably displayed depending on the starting winning (special drawing 1/special drawing). 2). That is, the pre-reading determination table includes a first pre-reading determination table (FIG. 13) in the case where a prize is won in the first starting opening 11 and a variable display of special drawing 1 is performed, and a first reading determining table (FIG. 13) when a prize is won in the second starting opening 12 and a special drawing is displayed. There is a second look-ahead determination table (FIG. 14) in which variable display of No. 2 is performed. Note that the prefetch determination performed based on the first prefetch determination table is also referred to as a "first prefetch determination," and the prefetch determination performed based on the second prefetch determination table is also referred to as a "second prefetch determination."

Further, the pre-reading determination table can also be associated with gaming states (normal gaming state/high probability high base gaming state/low probability high base gaming state) which will be described later. That is, the lookahead determination table includes a lookahead decision table used in the normal gaming state (a lookahead decision table for normal gaming state), and a lookahead decision table used in the high probability high base game state (high probability high base game state). There is a look-ahead determination table for the state) and a look-ahead determination table for the low probability high base gaming state (a look ahead determination table for the low probability high base gaming state).

In other words, the lookahead determination table includes a first lookahead decision table used in the normal gaming state, a first lookahead decision table used in the high probability high base gaming state, and a first lookahead decision table used in the high probability high base gaming state. A first lookahead determination table used, a second lookahead determination table used in the normal gaming state, a second lookahead determination table used in the high probability high base gaming state, and a second lookahead determination table used in the low probability high base gaming state. There is a second look-ahead determination table used for.

In addition, by the pre-reading determination using the pre-reading determination table shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the special symbol fluctuation pattern related to the variable display of the special symbol performed by winning the starting openings 11 and 12 is specified. That is, before the variable display of the special figure based on the winning is performed, the special figure fluctuation pattern related to the variable display of the special figure is specified as the pre-reading determination result. In the process of specifying the special figure fluctuation pattern, the propriety of the jackpot is also specified as a pre-read determination result.

The pre-reading determination result including information regarding the special figure fluctuation pattern etc. is associated with the start winning command. As will be described later, the start winning command is transmitted to the production control board 120 as a pre-read determination result along with its generation. Note that the type of information to be specified as the prefetch determination result can be changed as appropriate. For example, information regarding the type of jackpot symbol can also be included in the pre-reading determination result.

As described above, a variable display of the special symbol is performed on the special symbol display 81 by performing the jackpot determination, the jackpot symbol type determination, the reach determination, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination. Then, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a display result (result of the special symbol lottery) in the variable display of the special symbol, the next special symbol is not variably displayed and the jackpot game is subsequently executed. Next, the jackpot game will be explained.

3-3. Jackpot Game A jackpot game consists of multiple round games involving the opening and closing of the jackpot 14, an opening (also referred to as OP) from the start of the jackpot game until the start of the first round game, and a final round game. It includes an ending (also referred to as ED) from the end of the round game until the end of the jackpot game. Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game, and ends with the start of the next round game or the start of the ending.

Note that it is possible not to provide OP and ED. Furthermore, hereinafter, a predetermined number of round games (in a predetermined order) will be simply referred to as a "round." For example, the first round game is also referred to as "one round (1R)," and the tenth round game is also referred to as "10 rounds (10R)."

The pachinko game machine PY1 then controls the jackpot game using the jackpot game control table. The jackpot game control table can be set for each type of jackpot symbol. That is, it is possible to associate a jackpot game with a type of jackpot symbol. One or more types of jackpot games can be set.

The jackpot game control table stores elements constituting the jackpot game (jackpot game constituent elements). The jackpot game components include the number of round games, the number of times the jackpot opening 14 is opened in each round game, the type and opening time (opening pattern) of the jackpot opening for each opening, and the time to be closed until the next opening. (closing time), opening time (opening time), and ending time (ending time).

The pachinko game machine PY1 can control the jackpot game using a jackpot game control table as shown in FIG. 15(A), for example. That is, it is possible to set the type of jackpot game and the jackpot game components for each jackpot game as shown in FIG. 15(A). Here, the jackpot game set in FIG. 15(A) will be explained.

In the jackpot game associated with jackpot symbol A (hereinafter also referred to as "first jackpot game"), a round game is played 10 times. In each round game from 1R to 10R, the grand prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. Furthermore, there is an opening in which the jackpot 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the first jackpot game until the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the jackpot 14 remains closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game until the end of the first jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with jackpot symbol B (hereinafter also referred to as "second jackpot game"), a round game is played five times. In each round game from 1R to 5R, the big prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. Furthermore, there is an opening in which the jackpot 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the second jackpot game until the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the grand prize opening 14 remains closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game until the end of the second jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with jackpot symbol C (hereinafter also referred to as "third jackpot game"), a round game is played five times. In each round game from 1R to 5R, the big prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. Furthermore, there is an opening in which the jackpot 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the third jackpot game until the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big prize opening 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game until the end of the third jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with jackpot symbol D (hereinafter also referred to as "fourth jackpot game"), a round game is played 10 times. In each round game from 1R to 10R, the grand prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. Furthermore, there is an opening in which the big prize opening 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the fourth jackpot game until the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the big prize opening 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the end of the last round game until the end of the fourth jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol E (hereinafter also referred to as "fifth jackpot game"), a round game is played six times. In each round game from 1R to 6R, the big prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. Furthermore, there is an opening in which the jackpot 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the fifth jackpot game until the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the jackpot 14 remains closed for 10.0 seconds from the end of the last round game until the end of the fifth jackpot game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol F (hereinafter also referred to as "sixth jackpot game"), a round game is played six times. In each round game from 1R to 6R, the big prize opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the jackpot 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the sixth jackpot game until the start of the first round game. Furthermore, there is an ending in which the jackpot 14 remains closed for 10.0 seconds from the end of the last round game until the end of the sixth jackpot game.

In addition, in each round game, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected by the big winning hole sensor 14a, even before the maximum opening time of the big winning hole 14 has elapsed, the big winning hole is activated. The winning hole 14 is closed and the round game ends. Further, the types and specific contents of the jackpot game components can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, in the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 15(A), which type of jackpot game will be executed is determined by the type of jackpot symbol, but the jackpot game may be executed by a method different from this. You may also do so. For example, if a device is provided in the gaming area 6 that can allocate the prizes to two winning holes, if a winning hole is won in one of the winning holes, only a jackpot game consisting of a predetermined number of round games will be executed, but if a prize is won in the other winning hole, a predetermined winning hole will be executed. Either a jackpot game consisting of a larger number of round games or a jackpot game consisting of a smaller number of round games than a predetermined number may be executed with a predetermined probability by lottery or the like.

3-4. Game State Next, the game state that can be controlled by the pachinko game machine PY1 will be explained. The pachinko game machine PY1 has a jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is being executed and a non-jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is not being executed. The non-jackpot gaming states include a normal gaming state, which is a basic gaming state, and a specific gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. Factors that are "advantageous to the player" related to this specific gaming state include the jackpot probability and the ease with which the second starting port 12 can be opened. That is, the jackpot probability and the ease of opening the second starting port 12 can be associated with the specific gaming state.

What is advantageous to the player regarding the jackpot probability is that the jackpot probability is higher than in the normal gaming state, and it becomes easier to win the jackpot. Furthermore, the ease of opening the second starting port 12 that is advantageous to the player means that the ease of opening the second starting port 12 is higher than in the normal gaming state, and the second starting port 12 is opened per unit time. This means that it will take longer.

The specific gaming states include a first specific gaming state in which both the jackpot probability and the opening time per unit time of the second starting port 12 are advantageous to the player, and a second specific gaming state in which only the jackpot probability is advantageous to the player. Three types can be set: a specific gaming state and a third specific gaming state in which only the opening time per unit time of the second starting port 12 is advantageous to the player. Note that instead of installing all of these three types of specific gaming states in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, it is also possible to install some of the three types of specific gaming states.

Here, as a partial gaming state focusing on the jackpot probability, a state where the jackpot probability is higher than the normal gaming state and which is advantageous to the player regarding the jackpot probability is referred to as a "high probability state". On the other hand, the jackpot probability is the normal probability in the normal gaming state, and a state in which the jackpot probability is not advantageous to the player is referred to as a "normal probability state."

In addition, as a partial game state focusing on the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time, the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time is longer than the normal gaming state, and the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time is longer than the normal gaming state. A state in which the ease of opening (the ease of opening the second starting port 12) is advantageous to the player is referred to as a "time saving state". On the other hand, the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time is the opening time in the normal gaming state, and the state in which the ease of opening the second starting port 12 is not advantageous to the player is defined as "non-time saving". "state".

Here, the non-time saving state and the time saving state will be explained in detail. As described above, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time is longer than in the non-time saving state. That is, the time-saving state is a state in which it is easier to win a prize in the second starting port 12 than in the non-time-saving state. Here, a specific method for making it easier to win a prize in the second starting slot 12 in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state will be described.

For example, by making the time saving state a state in which the normal pattern variation time is likely to be shorter than in the non-time saving state, it is possible to make it easier to win a prize at the second starting port 12 in the time saving state. For example, as mentioned above, regardless of the result of the hit determination, in the time saving state, the normal pattern fluctuation time (5.0 seconds) is shorter than the normal pattern fluctuation time (30.0 seconds) determined in the non-time saving state. Let it be determined. As a result, in the time saving state, the number of times the regular lottery is executed per unit time is greater. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state, if the probability of winning in the hit judgment and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game are the same, then the number of regular lottery drawings per unit time is the same. As the number of executions increases, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes longer.

In addition, by making the time saving state a state where the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is likely to be longer than in the non-time saving state, it is possible to make it easier to win a prize in the second starting port 12 in the time saving state. . For example, as mentioned above, in the non-time saving state, the electric chew 12D opens for 0.2 seconds in one auxiliary game, whereas in the time saving state, the electric chew 12D opens for 5.0 seconds in one auxiliary game. Make it open for seconds. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state, if the probability of winning in the hit judgment and the normal pattern fluctuation time are the same, the number of times the auxiliary game is executed per unit time will be the same, so once The longer the electric chew 12D is opened in the auxiliary game, the longer the electric chew 12D is opened per unit time.

Furthermore, by making the time-saving state a state in which it is easier to determine a win in the winning determination compared to the non-time-saving state, it is possible to make it easier for the second starting port 12 to win a prize in the time-saving state. For example, as mentioned above, in the non-time-saving state, the probability of winning is determined to be 6600/65536, while in the time-saving state, the probability of winning is determined to be 59936/65536. . In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state, if the opening time of the electric chew 12D and the normal figure variation time in one auxiliary game are the same, the probability of a hit being determined is high. Since the number of hit determinations per unit time increases, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes longer.

In this way, the elements that make up the ease of opening in the time-saving state include the probability of winning in the hit determination (probability of winning), the regular figure fluctuation time, and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game. . In the time-saving state, it is easier to win than in the non-time-saving state, the normal figure fluctuation time is likely to be shorter, and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is likely to be longer. By satisfying the conditions, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes longer than in the non-time-saving state, and it is possible to easily win a prize in the second starting port 12. As a result, the so-called "base", which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of fired balls, increases. Therefore, in the time-saving state where the base is high, it is possible to aim for a jackpot win without greatly reducing the number of game balls in possession compared to the normal gaming state. In other words, it can be said that the time-saving state is more advantageous for the player than the non-time-saving state.

Note that in the time saving state, all three conditions for increasing the opening time per unit time of the second starting port 12 may not all be met, but only some of the conditions may be met. Finally, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time is longer than in the non-time-saving state, and winning into the second starting port 12 may be facilitated.

In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of executions of the special pattern variable display per unit time is small, or special The average figure fluctuation time may be made low. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace at which the reserved special drawings are consumed becomes faster, and effective winnings (winnings that can be stored as reserved special drawings) in the starting opening are more likely to occur. Therefore, players can aim for a jackpot while the game progresses smoothly.

In addition, in the following, the first specific gaming state will be referred to as a "high probability high base gaming state" and the second specific gaming state will be referred to as a "high probability low "Base gaming state" and the third specific gaming state are also referred to as "low probability high base gaming state." Furthermore, the normal gaming state is also referred to as a "low probability low base gaming state."

Therefore, the low probability low base gaming state can be said to be a gaming state controlled in a normal probability state and a non-time saving state. Similarly, the low probability high base gaming state is controlled as a normal probability state and a time saving state, the high probability low base gaming state is controlled as a high probability state and a non time saving state, and the high probability high base gaming state is controlled as a high probability state and a time saving state. It can be said that it is a gaming state in which

In this way, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can be controlled in a low probability low base gaming state, a low probability high base gaming state, a high probability low base gaming state, a high probability high base gaming state, and a jackpot gaming state. In addition, in the jackpot gaming state, the jackpot gaming state can also be said to be a gaming state advantageous to the player because the jackpot opening 14 is open for a long time and a large amount of game balls can be acquired. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state and the specific gaming state can also be called "advantageous gaming states" that are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.

Furthermore, the high probability high base gaming state and the high probability low base gaming state are gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the low probability low base gaming state in that the jackpot probability is higher than the normal probability state. be. In addition, the high probability high base gaming state and the low probability high base gaming state are more advantageous to the player than the low probability low base gaming state in that the ease of winning the second starting slot 12 is higher than in the non-time saving state. It is in a gaming state. Furthermore, in the jackpot game state, the jackpot game state is a low-probability, low-base game because the jackpot game state is a low-probability low-base game because the number of prize balls for one winning is greater than the first starting hole 11 and the second starting hole 12. This is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the current state.

Further, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is turned on, the normal gaming state is first set. Further, the jackpot game state is set by the stop display of jackpot symbols. On the other hand, the specific gaming state is set by winning a jackpot and executing a jackpot game. Next, the setting of the specific gaming state will be explained.

3-5. Setting a specific gaming state Pachinko gaming machine PY1 can newly set a specific gaming state upon completion of a jackpot game. That is, after a jackpot game, the game can be controlled and progressed in a specific game state. The duration of this specific gaming state can be set as appropriate. For example, a specific gaming state can be continued until the next jackpot is won. Furthermore, it is also possible to limit the period during which a specific gaming state can continue.

When limiting the duration of a specific gaming state, the specific gaming state can be ended when the termination condition for the duration is satisfied. Then, when the specific gaming state ends, the normal gaming state can be set. Further, regarding the high probability high base gaming state, when the termination condition is satisfied, a low probability high base gaming state or a high probability low base gaming state may be set. In this case, the newly set low probability high base gaming state or high probability low base gaming state may continue until the next jackpot is won. Furthermore, the same or different end conditions may be provided for the newly set low probability high base gaming state or the high probability low base gaming state, and when the end condition is met, the normal gaming state may be set.

Furthermore, the termination conditions for the duration of the specific gaming state can be set as appropriate. As the termination condition, for example, the number of execution times of special figure variable display can be set. In addition, it is not limited to the number of executions of the special figure variable display, but also the elapsed time after the jackpot game, the number of game balls fired after the jackpot game, the number of times the game ball passes through the gate 13 after the jackpot game, or whether to end the specific game state. It is possible to set the termination condition to be the result of terminating the lottery (so-called "fall lottery"). Furthermore, these elements may be set as end conditions singly or in combination.

In addition, these ending conditions may be set the same for all specific gaming states that can be set after a jackpot game, or may be set for some specific gaming states among the specific gaming states that can be set. You may do so. Furthermore, the termination conditions may be different for each specific game state.

Furthermore, the specific game state controlled after the jackpot game, the presence or absence of an end condition, and the content of the end condition can be associated with the jackpot symbol type related to the jackpot game. For example, when the jackpot symbol type is set as described above, as shown in FIG. The game may be controlled based on the state. Here, this high-probability, high-base game state can be continued until a jackpot is won without setting an end condition. Furthermore, after the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol C and the jackpot symbol E ends, the game may be controlled in a low probability high base gaming state. Here, an end condition can be set for this low probability high base game state, and the end condition can be set to 100 times of variable display of special symbols. In addition, the relationship between this jackpot type symbol, the specific game state controlled after the jackpot game, the presence or absence of an end condition, and the content of the end condition is an example, and is not limited to this.

In addition, focusing on the gaming profit of a jackpot, a jackpot in which the game progresses with a high probability after a jackpot game is also referred to as a "high probability jackpot." Further, a jackpot in which the game progresses in a high probability state and in a time saving state after a jackpot game is also referred to as a "probable jackpot". In addition, a jackpot in which the game progresses in a normal probability state and a time-saving state after a jackpot game is also referred to as a "time-saving jackpot."

4. Main performances performed by the gaming machine Next, the main performances performed by the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be explained using FIGS. 16 to 30.

4-1. Production Mode First, the production mode will be explained. The production mode is a division of production (or a superordinate attribute). The pachinko game machine PY1 can set a customer waiting performance mode, a normal performance mode, a variable probability performance mode, a time-saving performance mode, and a jackpot performance mode as performance modes.

In the customer waiting production mode, the special figure variable display is performed in the "low probability low base gaming state", "low probability high base gaming state", "high probability low base gaming state" and "high probability high base gaming state". This is a production mode that can be set when there is no special figure variable display and indicates a standby state in which special figure variable display is not performed. A customer waiting performance is performed when a customer waiting performance mode is set. In the customer waiting performance, for example, as shown in FIG. 16(A), a customer waiting demonstration video G100 introducing the pachinko game machine PY1 is displayed on the display section 50a. Furthermore, when the first effect button 40k is operated while the customer waiting demonstration video G100 is displayed, as shown in FIG. is displayed. Settings related to the effects include volume settings for the sound output from the speaker 52, brightness settings for the display section 50a, and frequency settings for the effects to be performed. Note that setting items related to presentation can be set as appropriate. Further, the setting screen G101 can be made not to be displayed from the customer waiting demonstration video G100 by the player's operation.

The normal production mode is a production mode that can be set in the "low probability low base gaming state" and indicates the normal gaming state. Further, a plurality of lower performance modes belonging to the normal performance mode can be provided. For example, a first normal presentation mode, a second normal presentation mode, a third normal presentation mode, etc. can be provided as presentation modes at a lower level belonging to the normal presentation mode.

In addition, below, the production mode of the lower hierarchy which belongs to production mode is also called "production stage." Accordingly, the first normal presentation mode is also referred to as the "first normal presentation stage," the second normal presentation mode is also referred to as the "second normal presentation stage," and the third normal presentation mode is also referred to as the "third normal presentation stage." say. In addition, unless there are special circumstances, basically the production mode that is set when the special figure fluctuation display starts for the first time after the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is powered on is the first normal production stage ( (first normal performance mode). However, the type of production mode that is initially set is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate.

In this way, when a plurality of performance stages belonging to the normal performance mode are provided, the performance stages can be repeatedly switched in order when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied. The switching condition can be set as appropriate, but for example, the switching condition can be set to a predetermined number of special symbol variable effects being performed without winning the jackpot. Further, as a switching condition, it can be set that a specific effect, such as a special symbol variation effect based on SP reach/loss variation, is executed.

In addition, as will be described later, a reach may occur in special figure fluctuation effects, but the special figure variation effect is the entire section of the special figure variation effect when a reach does not occur, and a reach is established when a reach occurs. It can be divided into the first part before the reach occurs, and the second part after the reach is established when a reach occurs. Note that the first part consists of the above-mentioned "normal fluctuations".

In the first stage of the first normal presentation stage, a background image (FIG. 17A: first normal background image G111) mainly representing a city view is displayed on the display section 50a. In the first stage of the second normal performance stage, a background image mainly representing the field of a baseball field (FIG. 17(B): second normal background image G112) is displayed on the display section 50a. In the first stage of the third normal performance stage, a background image mainly representing the inside of the restaurant (FIG. 17(C): third normal background image G113) is displayed on the display section 50a. On the other hand, in the latter part of the first to third normal performance stages, the first normal background image G111, the second normal background image G112, and the third normal background image G113 are not displayed. A special background image will be displayed depending on the type of reach.

Note that the dedicated background image according to the type of reach in the normal production mode may be a common background image in the normal production mode regardless of the type of production stage, or may be a different background image for each production stage.

Further, the normal performance mode may be set even in the "high probability low base game state", and the normal performance mode may be a performance mode indicating a non-time saving state. Alternatively, a predetermined performance mode that is set only in the "high probability low base game state" and is different from the normal performance mode may be provided. Further, a predetermined performance mode different from the normal performance mode may be set in a low probability low base game state and a high probability low base game state that occur under certain conditions.

The variable probability production mode is a production mode that can be set in the "high probability high base gaming state" and indicates the high probability high base gaming state. In the first stage of the probability variation production mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 17(D), a background image representing the universe (probability variation background image G120) is displayed on the display unit 50a, and probability variation BGM is output from the speaker 52. . In addition, in the latter part of the variable probability performance mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach in the variable probability performance mode is displayed.

The time-saving production mode is a production mode that can be set in the "low probability high base gaming state" and indicates the time-saving state. In the first stage of the time-saving production mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 17(E), a background image representing the sky (time-saving background image G130) is displayed on the display unit 50a, and time-saving BGM is output from the speaker 52. . In addition, in the latter part of the time-saving production mode, a dedicated background image is displayed according to the type of reach in the time-saving production mode.

The time saving production mode is set in a low probability high base gaming state and a high probability high base gaming state, and is either a low probability high base gaming state or a high probability high base gaming state, and is at least a time saving state. You can also set it to a production mode that shows that.

In addition, for either or both of the fixed variable production mode and the time-saving production mode, in the same way as the normal production mode, a plurality of production stages for the production mode are provided, and when a predetermined switching condition is met, the production stage is switched. You can also do it.

The jackpot production mode is a production mode that can be set when a jackpot game is being played in the "jackpot game state", and is a production mode that indicates that a jackpot game is being played. In the jackpot performance mode, for example, during the opening of a jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18(A), an opening image G1 that suggests the start of a jackpot game or a right-hand hit image G2 that encourages "right-hand hitting" is displayed on the display section 50a. A jackpot opening performance will be held where the will be displayed. In addition, during the opening, as a jackpot opening effect, a background image (opening background image G200) corresponding to the type of jackpot game is displayed on the display section 50a in the background of the opening image G1 and the right-handed image G2. .

In addition, in the jackpot production mode, during the round game in the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18(B), the right-handed image G2 is continuously displayed from the opening on the display section 50a, and the round image indicating the number of rounds is displayed on the display section 50a. A round effect is performed in which G3 and a prize ball number image G4 indicating the number of paid out prize balls are displayed. In addition, during a round game, as a round effect, a background image (round background) corresponding to the type of jackpot game is displayed on the display section 50a as a background of the right-handed hit image G2, the round image G3, and the prize ball number image G4. Image G201) is displayed, and BGM corresponding to the type of jackpot game is output from the speaker 52.

Furthermore, during the ending of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 18(C), the display section 50a displays an ending image G5 that suggests the production mode to be set after the jackpot game and the total number of prize balls that have been paid out. A jackpot ending effect is performed in which the total prize ball count image G6 is displayed. In addition, during the ending, as a jackpot ending effect, a background image (ending background image G202) corresponding to the type of jackpot game is displayed on the display section 50a in the background of the ending image G5 and the total prize ball count image G6. be done.

In addition, hereinafter, the jackpot opening performance, the round performance, and the jackpot ending performance are collectively referred to as the "jackpot game performance" as the performance executed in the jackpot game. That is, a jackpot game performance is performed in the jackpot performance mode.

4-2. Special figure variation effect Next, the special figure variation effect will be explained. When the variable display of the special pattern starts, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 displays the special pattern variation pattern related to the variable display of the special pattern and the special pattern lottery result (jackpot determination result, jackpot symbol type determination result, reach determination result, and A special figure variation effect is executed based on the special figure variation pattern determination result).

In the special symbol variation performance, a variation display of performance symbols is performed on the display unit 50a in a manner superimposed on a predetermined background image. In the fluctuating display of performance symbols, the performance symbols change and then stop. That is, after the special symbol fluctuation time and the variable display of the performance symbols are performed, the fluctuations are stopped and the static display of the performance symbols is performed. Then, basically, the result of the special drawing lottery is notified by the stop display of the performance symbols.

It should be noted that in the special symbol variation performance performed on the display section 50a, it is also possible to use images other than the variation display of production symbols. Furthermore, in addition to the image display device 50 including the display section 50a, a special feature using various presentation devices such as a speaker 52, a frame lamp 53, a board moving device 55, a first presentation button device 40, and a second presentation button device 41 is used. It is possible to perform figure fluctuation effects.

Next, the effect patterns displayed on the display section 50a in the special figure variable effect executed in response to the special figure variable display will be explained. The production pattern is also identification information for indicating the special drawing lottery result, and multiple types are provided. Specifically, one of the constituent elements of the effect pattern constitutes identification information for indicating the special drawing lottery result, and a plurality of types of effect patterns are provided depending on the difference in the identification information.

For example, as shown in FIG. 19(A), the effect patterns can be composed of numbers 1 to 9, and nine effect patterns can be provided. Then, a performance pattern including the number "1" is defined as a performance pattern G10a. Similarly, the performance symbols including numbers "2" to "9" are designated as performance symbols G10b to G10e. For convenience, when the individual performance symbols are handled without distinction, they are collectively referred to as "performance symbol G10."

In addition, the numerical parts of the production patterns G10c and G10g related to "3" and "7" are red, and "1", "2", "4", "5", "6", "8", and The numerical parts of the production patterns G10a, G10b, G10d, G10e, G10f, G10h, and G10i of "9" are blue. That is, colors are included in the constituent elements of the effect pattern G10. Note that the configuration of the performance symbol G10 and what the identification information is set to may be changed as appropriate. For example, other components such as characters associated with each number may be added to the production pattern G10.

Next, the effect pattern display area for displaying the effect pattern G10 will be explained. For example, as shown in FIG. 19(B), the display section 50a is divided into three parts approximately equally in the horizontal direction, and the left, center, and right sides are divided into a left presentation pattern area 50b1, a middle presentation pattern area 50b2, and a right presentation pattern. This can be the area 50b3. The performance pattern G10 is displayed in any of the left performance pattern area 50b1, the middle performance pattern area 50b2, and the right performance pattern area 50b3.

Mainly, in the first part of the special symbol variation performance, the performance pattern G10 displayed in the left performance pattern area 50b1 is collectively referred to as "left performance pattern EZ1", and the performance pattern G10 displayed in the middle performance pattern area 50b2 is collectively referred to as "left performance pattern EZ1". They are collectively referred to as "middle performance symbols EZ2," and the performance symbols G10 displayed in the right performance symbol area 50b3 are collectively referred to as "right performance symbols EZ3." That is, in the left performance pattern area 50b1, middle performance pattern area 50b2, and right performance pattern area 50b3, the performance pattern G10 consisting of numbers 1 to 9 is displayed in common, but the performance pattern G10 consisting of the numbers 1 to 9 is displayed in the relative display position. When distinguishing G10, it is written as a left performance pattern EZ1, a middle performance pattern EZ2, and a right performance pattern EZ3.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19(B), it is possible to provide a small pattern area 50c in which small patterns are variably displayed in one section of the left end (lower left corner) of the lower end of the display section 50a. In the small symbol area 50c, small symbols can be variably displayed in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol. Although the design of the small symbol can be set as appropriate, for example, the number part of the performance symbol G10 may be reduced as it is.

In addition, in FIG. 19(B), the left presentation pattern area 50b1, the middle presentation pattern area 50b2, the right presentation pattern area 50b3, and the small pattern area 50c are clearly indicated by dashed lines, but these are the left presentation pattern area 50b1, These are described to represent the ranges of the middle effect symbol area 50b2, right effect symbol area 50b3, and small symbol area 50c, and are not actually displayed.

Furthermore, as described above, the performances that constitute the performance flow of the special figure variation performance include normal variation, N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle performance. Some of these will now be explained.

4-2-1. Normal variation Pachinko gaming machine PY1 can first perform normal variation in the special figure variation performance. The normal variation functions as an effect that suggests that the variable display of the special figure has started. Next, normal fluctuations will be specifically explained. As small symbols, a left small symbol KZ1, a medium small symbol KZ2, and a right small symbol KZ3 corresponding to the left performance symbol EZ1, middle performance symbol EZ2, and right performance symbol EZ3 are variably displayed in the small symbol area 50c.

For example, as shown in FIG. 20(A), on the display section 50a, the left effect pattern EZ1, the medium effect pattern EZ2, and the right effect pattern EZ3 are stopped and displayed, and the left small pattern KZ1, the medium small pattern KZ2, and the right small pattern When the variable display of the special pattern starts from the state where the symbol KZ3 is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the special pattern is not performed, and the variable display of the special pattern is started, the variable display of the special pattern starts as shown in FIG. 20(B) As shown in the figure, the special figure variation effect is started along with the start. Specifically, the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started, and the variable display of the left small symbol KZ1, the medium and small symbols KZ2, and the right small symbol KZ3 is started.

The display mode of the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the display mode of the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 can be made different. For example, the variable display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed by scrolling each production symbol EZ1 to EZ3 from the top to the bottom of the display section 50a, and the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed by scrolling each of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 from the top to the bottom of the display section 50a. It is also possible to change the positions one after another at a fixed position. Note that the display mode of the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the display mode of the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 may be the same.

In addition, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are displayed in a variable manner at high speed immediately after the start of the variable display. While the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are being displayed in a high-speed variable manner, the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are basically images on the background side thereof, such as background images G111 to G114. is displayed with transparency for easy viewing.

Then, if the special pattern variation pattern of the variable display of this special pattern is a special pattern variation pattern with no reach and no loss (for example, normal loss variation), the variable display of the special pattern ends (special pattern (stop display), the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed at the loss eyes (so-called "rose eyes") that are unique to no-reach losses.

Toward the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, for example, first, as shown in FIG. 20(C), the left effect symbol EZ1 temporarily stops at approximately the center position in the vertical direction, and then as shown in FIG. 20(D). As shown, the right performance symbol EZ3 temporarily stops at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and furthermore, as shown in FIG. 20(E), the middle performance symbol EZ2 temporarily stops at a substantially central position in the vertical direction.

Finally, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, which are temporarily stopped in a state lined up horizontally at approximately the vertical center position, completely stop all at once, as shown in FIG. 20(F), and the stop is stopped. Confirmed (stop display of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed). When the temporarily stopped production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 completely stop at random, that is, when the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed, the three small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are replaced by the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3. They all stop at the same random number, and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are also stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the example of FIG. 20, when the stop display of the effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the effect patterns are temporarily stopped in the order of left effect pattern EZ1 → right effect pattern EZ3 → middle effect pattern EZ2, but they are temporarily stopped. The mode is not limited to this, and can be set as appropriate.

4-2-2. Reach Next, we will explain how reach is established. Even if the special figure variation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is a special figure variation pattern with reach and loss (for example, N loss variation), basically the same as the case without reach described above, on the display section 50a, As shown in FIG. 21(A), the variable display of the special symbol starts from a state where the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed, As shown in B), the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 starts, and the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 starts.

After that, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the left effect pattern EZ1 related to the number "5" temporarily stops at approximately the center position in the vertical direction, as shown in FIG. 21(C), and then as shown in FIG. 21(D). As such, the right performance symbols EZ3 related to the same number "5" are temporarily stopped in line in the horizontal direction at approximately the center position in the vertical direction, and a reach is established. Incidentally, even if the reach is achieved with the left performance symbol EZ1 and the right performance symbol EZ3, the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 continues to be performed.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 21, when the reach is established, the performance symbols are temporarily stopped in the order of left performance symbol EZ1 → right performance symbol EZ3, but the mode of temporary stopping is not limited to this, and may be set as appropriate. I can do it. Furthermore, the numbers of the production symbols that constitute the reach are not limited to "5" either. Furthermore, the temporary stopping position is not limited to the substantially central position in the vertical direction. Further, the direction in which the effect symbols forming the reach are lined up is not limited to the horizontal direction, but may be in other directions such as a diagonal direction.

In this way, the entire period of the special symbol variation performance when there is no reach and a loss, and the section from the start of the special symbol variation performance when the reach occurs to the time when the reach is established can be made into normal variation. However, the time until the reach is established can be appropriately set based on the special symbol fluctuation pattern and the like. Furthermore, it is also possible to perform various preview performances such as a so-called "pseudo series", a cut-in preview, and a dialogue preview until the reach is established. Alternatively, it is also possible to enter the so-called "zone" before the reach is established.

4-2-3. N-Reach Pachinko gaming machine PY1 is capable of performing N-Reach when a reach is established after a normal fluctuation. N reach is a performance that suggests that the lottery result of the special drawing lottery may have been a "big hit", and functions as a performance to make the player expect a big win. Next, N reach will be specifically explained.

When reach is established, for example, as shown in FIG. 21(D), N reach is performed from that point on. In N reach, as shown in FIG. 22(A), the state when reach is established is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). When the N reach is started, as shown in FIG. 22(B), the medium effect pattern EZ2, which is fluctuatingly displayed (scrolling) at high speed in the normal mode, gradually slows down.

If the special pattern variation pattern of the variable display of the special pattern is a special pattern variation pattern with reach and loss (for example, N loss variation), the middle production pattern EZ2 will temporarily stop at approximately the center position in the vertical direction from the state where reach is established. Then, a stop display of the effect symbol indicating a loss is performed. At this time, reach has been established, so as shown in Figure 22 (C-1), a medium effect symbol consisting of a number ("4" in Figure 22 (C-1)) different from the numbers that constitute the reach EZ2 temporarily stops. Then, with the end of the variable display of the special figure (stop display of the special figure), the temporary stop state becomes a complete stop state, as shown in FIG. The left effect pattern EZ1, the middle effect pattern EZ2, and the right effect pattern EZ3 are stopped and displayed.

In addition, when the temporarily stopped production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 completely stop at a loss that is unique to a loss with a reach, that is, when the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed, the three small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 However, they stop all at once at the same loss eyes that are unique to the same reach-to-reach loss as the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, and the stop display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is also performed. Note that the contents of N reach can be changed or added as appropriate.

If the special symbol variation performance does not end at N reach, as shown in Figure 22 (C-2), the remaining one medium performance symbol EZ2 that has not stopped will fluctuate at high speed again, and N while the reach is maintained. It may develop (switch) from reach to L reach or SP reach.

4-2-4. L Reach Pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform L Reach after N Reach. The L reach is a performance that suggests that the possibility that the result of the special drawing lottery will be a "big hit" is higher than the N reach, and functions as a performance to make the player expect a jackpot. Note that even in the case of L reach, the established reach is maintained, but for example, as shown in FIG. It moves to a predetermined position that does not overlap with the small symbol area 50c in the section 50a (for example, the left presentation symbol EZ1 is at the upper left of the display section 50a, and the right presentation symbol EZ3 is at the upper right of the display section 50a).

Moreover, at the start of L reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 23(A), a background image exclusively for L reach (background image for L reach G114) is displayed on the display unit 50a. The L reach background image G114 is composed of a moving image in which a predetermined story unfolds. The content of the story of the video related to the L reach background image G114 can be set as appropriate, but in the basic embodiment, the content is such that the main character confesses his feelings to a girl.

When the L reach background image G114 is displayed, the scene starts with the main character waiting for a girl at a meeting place, as shown in FIG. 23(A). Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 23(B), a girl appears at the meeting place. At this time, at approximately the center of the display section 50a, a production symbol with the number "5" that constitutes the reach and a production symbol with the number "4" that does not constitute the reach appear as the medium production symbol EZ2. It rotates slowly, coming out from the back side to the front side, and then returning to the back side.

While the rotation of the number "4" production symbol and the number "5" production symbol continues, the story related to the L reach background image G114 progresses. Then, as shown in FIG. 23(C), a scene in which the main character confesses his feelings to the girl comes. At this time, at approximately the center of the display section 50a, the effect pattern with the number "5" that makes up the reach and the effect pattern with the number "4" that does not make up the reach seem to mutually repel the opponent. collide with each other. The number "5" production symbol constitutes a reach, and the number "4" production symbol does not constitute a reach, so the number "4" production symbol is blown away and the number "5" production symbol is If it remains, the stop display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is established in a manner that indicates a jackpot, while if the production symbol with the number "5" is blown away and the production symbol with the number "4" remains, the production is in a manner that indicates a loss in reach. The stop display of symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is established. Therefore, the scene in FIG. 23(C) is the final phase of the L reach, and a performance suggesting a jackpot (jackpot suggestion performance) is executed or a performance suggesting a loss (loss suggestion performance) is executed. This constitutes a branching point (a so-called "win/lose branching point").

At the winning/losing point, if the special pattern variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is a jackpot variation (L jackpot variation), a smiling girl will appear close-up on the display section 50a, as shown in FIG. 24 (A-1). After that, as shown in Figure 24 (B-1), the protagonist character who is happy after successfully confessing is displayed. After the smiling girl is displayed close-up, as shown in Figure 24 (B-1). As shown, the main character who is happy after successfully confessing is displayed, and a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 52. At this time, along with the left performance symbol EZ1 and right performance symbol EZ3 of the number "5" that constitute the reach, the middle performance symbol EZ2 of the number "5" that constitutes the reach is temporarily stopped at the center of the display section 50a. displayed in the following manner. That is, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot.

The display of the main character happy after successfully confessing and the output of a predetermined sound effect constitute a jackpot suggestion production. After the jackpot suggesting performance, as shown in FIG. 24 (C-1), the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot.

On the other hand, after the winning/losing point, if the special symbol variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is a loss variation with reach (L loss variation), the jackpot suggestion effect is not performed and the figure is displayed in the L reach background image G114. As shown in FIG. 24 (A-2), a close-up of a girl with a sad expression is displayed on the display section 50a, and then, as shown in FIG. 24 (B-2), she is disappointed because she failed to confess. The main character will be displayed. At this time, along with the left performance symbol EZ1 and right performance symbol EZ3 of the number "5" that constitute the reach, the middle performance symbol EZ2 of the number "5" that does not constitute the reach is temporarily stopped at the center of the display section 50a. is displayed. That is, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating that the reach is out of reach.

The display of the main character being disappointed after failing to confess constitutes a presentation that suggests failure. After the loss suggestion performance, as shown in FIG. 24 (C-2), the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in the losing position for reach.

4-2-5. SP Reach Also, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform SP Reach after N Reach. The SP reach is a performance that suggests that the possibility that the result of the special drawing lottery will be a "big hit" is higher than the L reach, and functions as a performance to make the player expect a jackpot. Note that even in SP reach, the established reach is maintained, but for example, as shown in FIG. It moves to a predetermined position that does not overlap with the small symbol area 50c in the section 50a (for example, the left presentation symbol EZ1 is at the upper left of the display section 50a, and the right presentation symbol EZ3 is at the upper right of the display section 50a).

Furthermore, at the start of SP reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 25(A), a background image exclusively for SP reach (SP reach background image G115) is displayed on the display unit 50a. The SP reach background image G115 is composed of a moving image in which a predetermined story unfolds. The content of the story of the video related to the background image G115 for SP reach can be set as appropriate, but in the basic embodiment, it consists of a confrontation between the main character and an enemy character who is a rival of the main character. ing. The main character is a baseball pitcher, the enemy character is a baseball batter, and the two face off in a baseball game from the standpoint of a pitcher and a batter.

When the background image G115 for SP reach is displayed, an enemy character first appears as shown in FIG. 25(A), and then an enemy character appears in the center of the display section 50a as shown in FIG. 25(B). An image (SP reach start title image) G11 indicating that SP reach has started is displayed. The SP reach start title image G11 is composed of a title image G11a representing the title of the SP reach "In FIG. Ru.

Next, as shown in FIG. 25(C), a scene in which the main character and the enemy character are facing each other is displayed. After that, in the SP reach background image G115, as shown in FIG. 26(A), the main character throws a ball, and as shown in FIG. 26(B), the ball advances toward the enemy character, and as shown in FIG. As shown in C), the enemy character starts swinging the bat. Next, as shown in FIG. 26(D), the ball and bat approach each other, and a scene appears where the confrontation between the protagonist character and the enemy character is about to come to an end. This scene constitutes a turning point in the confrontation between the pitcher and the batter, where the main character wins, suggesting a jackpot, or loses, suggesting a loss.

After this winning/losing point, if the special pattern variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is a jackpot variation (SP jackpot variation), as shown in FIG. After winning the battle, as shown in FIG. 27 (B-1), the main character strikes out the enemy character and screams on the mound, and a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 52. be done. At this time, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot.

The display of the main character shouting after winning the battle and the output of a predetermined sound effect constitute a performance suggesting a jackpot. After the jackpot suggesting performance, as shown in FIG. 27 (C-1), the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a jackpot.

On the other hand, after the winning/losing point, if the special symbol variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is a reach loss variation (SP loss variation), the jackpot suggestion effect is not performed and the SP reach background image G115 is displayed as shown in FIG. 27 ( As shown in A-2), the enemy character hits a home run and loses the match, and as shown in FIG. 27 (B-2), the main character is disappointed on the mound. At this time, the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a reach loss.

The display of the main character being disappointed after losing the battle constitutes a presentation that suggests failure. After the loss suggestion performance, as shown in FIG. 27 (C-2), the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in the losing eye for reach.

Next, the movable object performance and operation performance performed in the special figure variation performance will be explained. The movable body performance and operation performance may be performed as part of the above-mentioned SP reach, L reach, N reach, or jackpot game performance, etc., or may be performed independently of these performances. Sometimes it is done. First, I will explain the moving object performance.

4-3. Movable Body Performance The pachinko game machine PY1 is capable of performing a movable body performance that involves the movement of a movable body at a predetermined timing in a predetermined performance such as a special figure variation performance or a jackpot game performance. The movable object performance is a performance using a movable device such as the board movable device 55, and functions as a performance that suggests the degree of expectation of a jackpot or development to SP reach.

For example, when the movable object effect functions as an effect that suggests the development to SP reach, as shown in Fig. 28 (A), when developing from N reach to SP reach in the special figure variation effect, first As shown in (B), the plate movable device 55 is activated, and the plate movable body 55k is lowered to the operating position when viewed from the front, and is held at that position for a predetermined period of time. Furthermore, at this time, an effect image G13 associated with the operation of the movable board 55k is also displayed on the entire display section 50a. Then, as shown in FIG. 28(C), the effect image G13 is erased, the board movable body 55k rises to the standby position, and the board movable device 55 returns to the normal standby state. When the board moving device 55 returns to the normal standby state, it develops into SP reach. Note that the operation details of the movable device in the movable body performance can be changed or added as appropriate.

4-4. Operation Performance Next, the operation performance will be explained. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 performs an operation promotion performance at a predetermined timing in a predetermined performance such as a special figure fluctuation performance or a jackpot game performance, and an operation result performance according to the operation of the first performance button 40k, the second performance button 41k, etc. It is possible to perform operations including. The operation promotion performance is a performance that encourages the player to operate the operation means, and the operation result performance is a performance that is performed in response to the operation of the operation means in the operation promotion performance, and each is a performance to make the player expect a jackpot. It functions as a performance.

For example, as mentioned above, when a winning or losing point is reached in L reach or SP reach, a period during which the pressing operation of the first effect button 40k is valid (first effect button operation valid period) occurs, and this first effect button With the occurrence of the valid operation period, as shown in FIG. 29(A), a performance (first performance button operation promotion performance) that prompts the operation of the first performance button 40k is performed.

In the first performance button operation promotion performance, a first performance button operation promotion performance image G12 is displayed on the display section 50a. The first performance button operation promotion performance image G12 includes an image (operation target image) G12a representing the first performance button 40k to be operated, and an image (pressing operation image) G12b, and an image representing the remaining time of the operation valid period (first effect button operation valid period) related to the operation of the first effect button 40k (first effect button operation valid period remaining time image) G12c. .

The remaining time image G12c of the first effect button operation valid period is made up of a roughly curved progress bar, so that the player can easily understand the remaining time of the first effect button operation valid period as time passes. Changes to Note that FIG. 29(B) shows a state in which the first effect button operation valid period has occurred and 1/3 of the first effect button operation valid time has passed.

Then, when the special pattern variation pattern of the variable display of the special pattern is a jackpot variation (SP jackpot variation), after the first production button 40k is pressed during the first production button operation valid period, or after the first production button 40k is pressed, or the first production button After the first performance button 40k is not operated during the operation validity period and the remaining time of the first performance button operation validity period runs out, the operation result performance is performed.

As shown in FIG. 29(C), for example, as shown in FIG. 29(C), the operation result is that the panel movable device 55 is operated, the panel movable body 55k is lowered to the operating position, is held at that position for a predetermined time, and the rotating member 55k1 is lowered. rotates for a predetermined time. In this way, the operation result presentation also includes the movable object presentation. Furthermore, at this time, an effect image G13 accompanying the movement of the board movable body 55k is displayed on the entire display section 50a as an operation result effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 29(D), the effect image G13 is erased, the rotation of the rotating member 55k1 is stopped, and the movable board 55k is raised, thereby ending the operation result production. When the operation result presentation is completed, a jackpot suggestion presentation is performed.

On the other hand, if the special symbol variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is reach loss variation (SP loss variation), even if the first production button 40k is pressed during the first production button operation validity period, or the first production button Even if 40k is not pressed and the remaining time of the performance button operation valid period runs out, the operation result performance is not performed and the loss suggesting performance is performed.

Note that the operation result presentation is not limited to the operation of the board moving device 55 or the display of the effect image G13, but can be changed or added as appropriate. Further, the operation performance is not limited to the special symbol variation performance, but can also be executed in the jackpot performance.

4-5. Pre-reading effect Next, a pre-reading effect that can be executed before the special figure variable display subject to special figure reservation is executed will be explained. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 is capable of performing a look-ahead effect for special figure 1 pending or special figure 2 hold for which a jackpot determination has not been made, based on the result of the look-ahead determination, at any timing of the special figure fluctuation effect. . The pre-read performance is a performance that suggests the degree of expectation of a jackpot for the special figure 1 reservation or the special figure 2 reservation, and functions as a performance that makes the player expect a jackpot even before the variable display of the special figure corresponding to the reservation. As an example of a look-ahead performance, there is a reservation change notice using a reservation performance that represents special map reservation. Here, the pending performance and pending change notice performed in the normal performance mode will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 30(A), the hold effect is performed in a hold display area 50d formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a section in the substantially center of the lower end of the display section 50a. The hold display area 50d is composed of a first area 50d1, a second area 50d2, a third area 50d3, and a fourth area 50d4, which are obtained by dividing the hold display area 50d into four substantially equally in the left and right direction. That is, in the hold display area 50d, the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 are arranged in order from the left end to the right end.

In the first area 50d1, the first variable display of special figure 1 is displayed based on the special figure 1 related random number that occurs first among the reserved special figure 1 reserves and corresponds to the special figure 1 reserve. A hold icon representing special figure 1 hold is displayed. Similarly, in the second area 50d2 to fourth area 50d4, the second to fourth reserved special figure 1 reservations are generated based on the special figure 1 related random numbers corresponding to the special figure 1 reservations. A hold icon representing special figure 1 hold, in which special figure 1 variable display is performed, is displayed second to fourth.

In addition, below, the special figure 1 reservation corresponding to the reservation icon displayed in 1st area|region 50d1 is called "special figure 1 reservation of reservation order 1." Similarly, the special figure 1 reservation corresponding to the reservation icons displayed in the second area 50d2, third area 50d3, and fourth area 50d4 is referred to as "special figure 1 reservation in reservation order 2" and "special figure 1 reservation in reservation order 3." "Special figure 1 reservation" and "Special figure 1 reservation of reservation order 4". That is, the existing special drawing 1 reservations are referred to as "reservation order 1" to "reservation order 4" in the order in which they occur.

Furthermore, the variable display area 50e is formed to the left of the hold display area 50d. The icon representing the special figure 1 variable display currently being executed is displayed in the variable display area 50e. Therefore, the object indicated by the icon displayed in the variable display area 50e is different from the object indicated by the hold icon displayed in the hold display area 50d, and strictly speaking, the object indicated by the icon displayed in the change display area 50e is different from the object shown by the hold icon displayed in the hold display area 50d. is not included, but since there is a relationship between the display of the pending icon and the display of the icon, in the following, the display of the pending icon and the display of the icon will be collectively referred to as "pending effect". . Further, the hold icon and the icon are collectively referred to as an "icon." Furthermore, the special figure 1 variation display being executed that the icon indicates is also referred to as "the variation".

In addition, in FIG. 30(A), the pending display area 50d and the variable display area 50e are clearly indicated by dashed lines, and the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 are clearly indicated by broken lines, but these are the pending display area 50d, This is described to represent the range of the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 and the variable display area 50e, and is not actually displayed.

Next, a specific example of the hold effect will be explained. In the following explanation, variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 will be omitted. As a premise, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variable display is in progress (the special figure variable effect is in progress) and the number of special figure 1 reservations (U1) is "2". Under this situation, as shown in FIG. 30(B), in the aforementioned first area 50d1 (not shown), the special figure 1 hold that occurred first among the currently held special figure 1 hold (order of hold) A reservation icon HA2 representing a special figure 1 reservation (reservation order 2) is displayed, and in the aforementioned second area 50d2 (not shown), a reservation icon HA2 representing a special figure 1 reservation (reservation order 2 A hold icon HA3 representing special figure 1 hold) is displayed. Further, in the aforementioned variable display area 50e (not shown), the icon HA1 representing the currently executed special figure 1 variable display is displayed. Note that the display mode of the icons HA1 to HA3 displayed in FIG. 30(B) is the normal mode.

In this manner, in the hold performance, special drawings 1 are displayed in order of occurrence from the left end to the right of the hold display area 50d. That is, the variable display of reserved special symbols, in other words, the variable display of unexecuted special symbols based on the special symbol related determination information stored in the special symbol reservation storage unit 105, is individually displayed with a reservation icon. Ru.

Then, as shown in FIG. 30(C), when the stop display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the icon HA1, which had been representing the special symbol variation display being executed until immediately before, is erased. Continuously, when variable display of special symbols (special figure variation effect) is started based on the special figure 1 hold representing the hold icon HA2, the hold icon HA2 and the hold icon HA3 are shifted. Specifically, the hold icon HA2 that was displayed in the first area 50d1 (not shown) moves to the variable display area 50e (not shown), and the hold icon HA3 that was displayed in the second area 50d2 (not shown) is moved to the corresponding variable display area 50e (not shown). Move to the illustrated first area 50d1. That is, the displayed hold icon HA2 and hold icon HA3 are each shifted one by one to the left. This means that the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon HA2 is started, and the special figure 1 hold that the hold icon HA3 represents is the special figure 1 hold that occurred first among the currently held special figure 1 hold. This is to adapt the hold icon HA2 and the hold icon HA3 to the situation in response to the special figure variable display being started next.

Further, the pending icon HA2 displayed in the variable display area 50e represents the special figure 1 variable display being executed, so it becomes the icon HA2 when displayed in the variable display area 50e. That is, the word "icon" is prefixed to "pending" for the icon displayed in the pending display area 50d, and "relevant" for the icon displayed in the variable display area 50e. In other words, when the hold icon is displayed, if the start condition for the special symbol fluctuation display is satisfied for the special symbol reservation indicated by the hold icon, the special symbol fluctuation display related to the establishment of the start condition is A corresponding hold icon is displayed as the icon.

Note that when changing from a pending icon to the relevant icon, in other words, when the icon moves from the pending display area 50d to the variable display area 50e, the size of the icon may remain the same or may be enlarged. In FIG. 30(C), the icon is enlarged approximately twice when moving from the hold display area 50d to the variable display area 50e.

Then, from this situation, when a game ball enters the first starting port 11 and a special drawing 1 reservation occurs, a new reservation is made according to the occurrence of the special symbol 1 reservation, as shown in FIG. 30(E). Icon HA4 is displayed in the aforementioned second area 50d2 (not shown).

In this way, when a prize is won in the first starting slot 11 and a special drawing 1 related random number is acquired, one common icon is displayed. This icon will disappear when the special figure 1 variable display based on the winning prize ends, but while it is displayed, it will remain in the state in which the special figure 1 variable display is placed (on hold and in progress). Depending on the icon, the icon exists under different names (pending icon and the icon).

By the way, as mentioned above, the start winning command includes win/fail information and special figure fluctuation pattern information. Then, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can display the hold icon in a normal mode or a special mode based on this validity information and special symbol variation pattern information. Displaying this hold icon in a special manner is called a "hold notice."

When the display mode of the pending icon is a special mode, that is, when a pending notice is given, the player can expect that he may win a jackpot with the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the pending icon. Next, a specific example of the suspension notice will be explained. As a specific example of the suspension notice, assume that the display mode of the suspension icon HA4 shown in FIG. 30(E) becomes a special mode.

One type of reservation notice is a reservation notice that enters a special mode immediately after the reservation icon is displayed, in other words, a reservation notice is given when special drawing 1 reservation occurs (at the time of winning at the first starting gate 11). There are types. For example, as shown in FIG. 31(A), from the situation before the hold icon HA4 is displayed (the situation in FIG. 30(D)), a game ball enters the first starting port 11, and the special figure 1 is put on hold. When this occurs, similarly to the case of FIG. 30(E), in response to the occurrence of the special drawing 1 holding, the holding icon HA4 in the normal mode is displayed in the aforementioned second area 50d2 (not shown). In addition, in the drawing, the hold icon in the normal mode appears to be completely stationary, but in reality, basically, even if it is completely stationary, the display position does not move, but it remains in place. It may also be configured so that it shakes slightly.

Immediately thereafter, as shown in FIG. 31(B), the display mode of the hold icon HA4 changes from the normal mode to the special mode (gray in FIG. 31(B)) (the hold notice is given). In the example of FIG. 29, the hold icon HA4 is displayed in the normal mode for a moment after being displayed, but it may be displayed in a special mode and the period during which it is displayed in the normal mode may be eliminated.

As another type of reservation notice, there is a reservation notice type in which the reservation icon takes a special mode when it moves, in other words, a reservation icon change notice is given when the special figure 1 reservation is shifted. For example, as shown in FIG. 32(A), from the situation before the hold icon HA4 is displayed (the situation in FIG. 30(D)), a game ball enters the first starting port 11, and the special figure 1 is put on hold. When this occurs, as shown in FIG. 32(B), in response to the occurrence of the special drawing 1 holding, the holding icon HA4 in the normal mode (white in FIG. 32(B)) moves to the aforementioned second area 50d2 (not shown). will be displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 32(C), when the stop display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the icon HA2, which had been representing the special symbol variation display being executed until immediately before, is erased. Subsequently, when the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol variation effect) is started based on the special symbol 1 reservation represented by the reservation icon HA3, as shown in FIG. 32(D), the special symbol is displayed in the first area 50d1. The hold icon HA3 moved to the corresponding variable display area 50e (not shown), and the hold icon HA4 displayed in the second area 50d2 moves to the first area 50d1 (not shown). Here, when the hold icon HA4 moves from the second area 50d2 to the first area 50d1, its display mode changes from a normal mode to a special mode (gray in FIG. 32(D)) (a notice of hold is given) .

Furthermore, it is possible to provide a plurality of types of special modes related to the reservation notice, so that the degree of jackpot expectation can be made different depending on the type of the special mode. For example, it is assumed that the display mode of the hold icon is associated with the color of the hold icon, and white, green, red, and gold are set as the display mode of the hold icon. Here, white is the normal mode, and green, red, and gold are the special modes. The jackpot expectation level indicated by the display mode of the pending icon can be set to increase in the order of white < green < red < gold.

In addition, the pre-reading performance can be performed for both or one of the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure 2 reservation. Further, the pre-read effect is not limited to the display mode of the hold icon HA, but includes images other than the hold icon HA on the display section 50a such as a background image, sound output from the speaker 52, light emission from the frame lamp 53, and board movement. It is possible to perform the operation using a presentation device other than the image display device 50, such as the operation by the device 55. Furthermore, as a production mode of the look-ahead production, in addition to a production mode that continues without interruption from the execution until the special symbol change display starts, such as a pending icon change notice by the pending icon HA, there is also a stoppage of the production pattern. It is also possible to use a performance mode that is executed intermittently and continuously, such as every time a display is performed or a variable display of performance symbols is started.

5. Game control by game control microcomputer 101 [Game control main processing]
Next, game control by the game control microcomputer 101 will be explained based on FIGS. 33 to 42. Note that the flowchart for controlling the game described below is an example. As for the plurality of processes in the flowchart, the order of execution can be changed as appropriate or the processes can be executed in parallel as long as there is no inconsistency in the process contents.

Further, counters, timers, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the game control by the game control microcomputer 101, which will be explained below, are provided in the game RAM 104. Further, the initial value of the counter is "0", the initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", and the initial value of the status is "1".

When the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered on, the game control microcomputer 101 provided in the game control board 100 reads out and executes the game control main processing program shown in FIG. 33 from the game ROM 103. As shown in the figure, in the game control main process, first, a power-on process (S001) is performed. The power-on processing includes permission settings for access to the gaming RAM 104, settings for the gaming CPU 102, SIO (System Input/Output), PIO (Parallel Input/Output), and CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit: interrupt time management). settings etc. of the circuit for

Following the power-on processing, interrupts are prohibited (S002), and normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing (S003) is executed. In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003), the counter values of various random numbers related to the regular symbol related determination information and the special symbol related determination information are updated by adding one. When the counter value of each random number reaches the upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be changed randomly. Further, at least a portion of each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

When the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) is completed, an interrupt is permitted (S004). While interrupts are enabled, game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) can be executed. The game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the gaming CPU 102 at a cycle of, for example, 4 msec. That is, the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is executed at a cycle of 4 msec. Then, after the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) ends and until the next game control side timer interrupt process (S005) starts, the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S003) The process of updating counter values of various random numbers is repeatedly executed. In addition, if an interrupt pulse is input to the gaming CPU 102 while interrupts are disabled, the gaming control side timer interrupt processing (S005) will not start immediately, but will start after interrupts are enabled (S004). .

[Game control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005) will be explained. As shown in FIG. 34, in the game control side timer interrupt processing (S005), output processing (S101) is first executed. In the output process (S101), commands etc. set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104 of the game control board 100 in each process described below are output to the production control board 120, payout control board 170, etc.

In the input process (S102) performed after the output process (S101), the game control microcomputer 101 takes in the detection signal from the lower tray full switch that detects the fullness of the surplus ball storage hole 35A, and inputs the detection signal from the lower tray full switch to the game as the lower tray full data. The data is stored in the output buffer of the RAM 104.

The normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed next is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) performed in the game control main process of FIG. 33. That is, the updating process of the counter values of various random numbers related to the general figure related determination information and the special figure related determination information is performed during the execution period of the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) and the other period (main side timer interrupt process (S005)). After the end of S005), this is performed both during the period until the next game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is started.

Next to the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103), the game control microcomputer 101 performs a sensor detection process (S104), then performs a normal operation process (S105), and further performs a special operation process (S106). conduct. The sensor detection process, normal operation process, and special operation process will be described later.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 executes other processes (S107) and ends the game control side timer interrupt process (S005). Other processing (S107) includes power-off monitoring processing when the power is cut off, updating of a timer provided in the gaming RAM 104, and the like. Further, as other processing (S107), a payout control process is performed to pay out prize balls to the player. In the payout control process, the prize ball counter for the first starting hole 11, the prize ball counter for the second starting hole 12, the prize ball counter for the big winning hole 14, and the prize ball counter for the general winning hole 10 are set to " A check is made to see if it exceeds "0", and if it exceeds "0", a prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control board 170. Then, when transmitting the prize ball signal, an update process is performed to subtract "1" from the prize ball counter related to the signal.

Then, the gaming control microcomputer 101 repeatedly executes steps S002 to S004 of the gaming control main processing until the next interrupt pulse is input to the gaming CPU 102, and when the interrupt pulse is input (approximately 4 msec later) ), the game control side timer interrupt process (S005) is executed again. In the output processing (S101) of the gaming control side timer interrupt processing (S005) executed again, the gaming control microcomputer 101 outputs the data that was set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 in the previous gaming control side timer interrupt processing (S005). Outputs commands etc.

[Sensor detection processing]
Next, sensor detection processing will be explained using FIGS. 35 and 36. In the sensor detection process (S104), first, it is determined whether a game ball has won in the general winning hole 10, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the general winning hole sensor 10a (S201). If a game ball has not entered the general winning hole 10 (NO in S201), the process advances to step S203, and if a game ball has entered the general winning hole 10 (YES in S201), a predetermined number of game balls have been entered into the game ball. General winning hole prize ball processing for paying out prize balls is performed (S202). In the general winning hole prize ball process, the number of prize balls ("3" in the basic embodiment) corresponding to the winning into the general winning hole 10 is added to the prize ball counter for the general winning hole 10.

In step S203, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the gate 13, that is, whether the game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 13a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 13 (NO in S203), the process advances to step S207. On the other hand, if the game ball has passed through the gate 13 (YES in S203), whether the normal operation status (described later) is 1 or not, in other words, whether the normal figure variable display or the auxiliary game is being performed. It is determined whether or not (S204). If the normal operation status is not 1 (NO in S204), the process advances to step S207, and if the normal operation status is 1 (YES in S204), the counter value of the normal symbol random number counter (label-TRND-F) is The normal symbol random number indicated by is acquired as the common symbol related determination information (S205), the acquired common symbol related determination information is stored in the common symbol retention storage section 86 provided in the gaming RAM 104 (S206), and step S207 Proceed to.

In step S207, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the second starting port 12, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the second starting port sensor 12a. If the game ball has not entered the second starting port 12 (NO in S207), the process advances to step S214, and if the game ball has entered the second starting port 12 (YES in S207), the game ball has been placed in the predetermined position. Second starting hole prize ball processing is performed to pay out the number of prize balls (S208). In the second starting hole prize ball process, the number of prize balls ("2" in the first embodiment) corresponding to the prize entered into the second starting hole 12 is added to the prize ball counter for the second starting hole 12.

Next, if the number of special drawings 2 pending (specifically the value of the counter (special drawing 2 holding number counter) provided in the gaming RAM 104 that counts the number of special drawings 2 holding) is "4" (upper limit memory number) or more, It is determined whether there is one (S209). If the number of reserved special drawings 2 is "4" or more (YES in S209), the process advances to step S214, but if the number of reserved special drawings 2 is not "4" or more (less than "4"), ( NO in S209), the special figure 2 reservation number addition process is performed (S210). In the special figure 2 reservation number addition process, the special figure 2 reservation number counter is incremented by 1, and the special figure 2 reservation number indicated by the special figure 2 reservation display 83b is increased by 1.

Next, special symbol random number counter (label-TRND-T), jackpot symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-OS), reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), and special symbol variation pattern random number counter (label-TRND- The special figure 2 related determination information consisting of HP) is acquired and stored in the special figure related determination information buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104 (S211).

Next, a second prefetch determination process is performed (S212). In the second look-ahead determination process, the second start winning command is specified by comparing the current gaming state with the special figure 2 related determination information acquired in step S211 in the second look-ahead determination table shown in FIG. A second starting winning command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the special figure 2 related determination information acquired in step S211 in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b (S213).

Subsequently, in step S214, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the first starting port 11, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the first starting port sensor 11a. If the game ball has not entered the first starting port 11 (NO in S214), the process proceeds to step S221, and if the game ball has entered the first starting port 11 (YES in S214), the game ball has been placed in the predetermined position. First starting hole prize ball processing is performed to pay out the number of prize balls (S215). In the first starting hole prize ball process, the number of prize balls ("4" in the first embodiment) corresponding to the prize entered into the first starting hole 11 is added to the prize ball counter for the first starting hole 11.

Next, the number of special figure 1 reservations (specifically, the value of the counter (special figure 1 reservation number counter) provided in the gaming RAM 104 that counts the number of special figure 1 reservations) is "4" (upper limit memory number) or more. It is determined whether or not (S216). If the number of reserved special drawings 1 is "4" or more (YES in S216), the process proceeds to step S221, but if the number of reserved special drawings 1 is not greater than (less than) "4" (NO in S216), the process proceeds to step S221. ), the special figure 1 reservation number addition process is performed (S217). In the special figure 1 reservation number addition process, the special figure 1 reservation number counter is incremented by 1, and the special figure 1 reservation number indicated by the special figure 1 reservation display 83a is increased by 1.

Next, special symbol random number counter (label-TRND-T), jackpot symbol type random number counter (label-TRND-OS), reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), and special symbol variation pattern random number counter (label-TRND- The special figure 1 related determination information consisting of HP) is acquired and stored in the special figure related determination information buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104 (S218).

Next, a first look-ahead determination process is performed (S219). In the first lookahead determination process, the first start winning command is identified by comparing the current gaming state and the special figure 1 related determination information acquired in step S218 in the first lookahead determination table shown in FIG. A first start winning command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the special figure 1 related determination information acquired in step S218 in a storage area corresponding to the current number of special figure 1 reserves in the special figure 1 reserve storage section 105a (S220).

In step S221, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the big winning hole 14, that is, whether a game ball has been detected by the big winning hole sensor 14a. If a game ball has not entered the grand prize opening 14 (NO in S221), the sensor detection process is terminated, and if a gaming ball has entered the grand prize opening 14 (YES in S221), the memory is stored in the gaming RAM 104. It is determined whether the counter value of the provided big winning opening prize counter is "9" or more (S222). The big winning hole prize counter is a counter for counting the number of prizes won in the big winning hole 14 in one round game of the big winning game. It should be noted that the big winning opening winning counter is cleared every time each round game ends. In the first embodiment, the prescribed number of winning prizes is set to "10". Therefore, the process of step S222 is performed.

If the counter value of the big winning opening prize counter is "11" or more (YES in S222), the sensor detection process is ended, and the counter value of the big winning opening prize counter is not more than "11", that is, less than "11". If so (NO in S222), the counter value of the big winning hole prize counter is incremented by 1 (S223), and the big winning hole prize ball processing is performed to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls to the player (S224). ), the sensor detection process ends. In addition, in the big winning hole prize ball process, the number of prize balls ("9" in the first embodiment) corresponding to the winning into the big winning hole 14 is added to the prize ball counter for the big winning hole 14.

Note that sensors other than sensors 10a to 14a are provided as sensors capable of detecting game balls, and processes other than those shown in FIGS. 35 to 36 are performed based on the sensor detecting a game ball. Also good.

[Normal operation processing]
Next, normal operation processing regarding control of the normal figure display 82 and the electric chew 12D will be explained. As shown in FIG. 37, the processing regarding the general figure display 82 and electric chew 12D is divided into four statuses (stages). Then, "normal operation status=1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each of these statuses. In the normal operation process (S105), the game control microcomputer 101 first checks the "normal operation status" (S1101). When the "normal operation status" is "1", a normal symbol standby process (S1102) is performed, and when the "normal operation status" is "2", a normal symbol variation process (S1103) is performed, When the "normal operation status" is "3", a normal symbol confirmation process (S1104) is performed, and when the "normal operation status" is "4", an auxiliary game control process (S1105) is performed. Note that the "normal operation status" is initially set to "1".

The normal symbol standby process (S1102) is a process that is performed during standby when the variable display of the normal symbol and the auxiliary game are not performed. In the normal symbol standby process (S1102), a hit determination is performed based on the normal symbol random number stored in the regular symbol reservation storage section 86. Furthermore, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern is determined based on the current game state, and the normal pattern fluctuation pattern is displayed on the normal pattern display 82 for the normal pattern fluctuation time according to the determined general pattern fluctuation pattern. , and change the normal operation status to "2". In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a normal pattern fluctuation start command in accordance with the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination result in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display.

The normal symbol variation process (S1103) is a process that is performed when the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In the normal symbol variation process (S1103), it is determined whether or not the common symbol variation time has elapsed since the fluctuating display of the common symbol that is being executed has started (whether or not to end the fluctuating display of the common symbol), and If it is determined that the figure variation time has elapsed, the normal figure is stopped and displayed based on the hit determination result, and the normal operation status is changed to "3". Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a normal pattern fluctuation stop command to the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display.

The ordinary symbol confirmation process (S1104) is a process that is performed when the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed. In the normal symbol confirmation process (S1104), it is determined whether a predetermined stop time (for example, 0.8 seconds) has elapsed since the stop display of the common symbol that is being executed has started (whether to end the stop display of the common symbol). If it is determined that a predetermined stop time has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the common symbol that is being stopped and displayed is a winning symbol. If it is not a winning symbol (if the stopped and displayed regular symbol is a losing symbol), the normal operation status is changed to "1". On the other hand, if the winning symbols are stopped and displayed, the normal operation status is changed to "4" and the auxiliary game is started based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table. Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 101 sets an auxiliary game start command to the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 at the time of starting the auxiliary game.

The auxiliary game control process (S1105) is a process that is performed when the auxiliary game is being played. In the auxiliary game control process (S1105), the auxiliary game is controlled based on the current gaming state and the auxiliary game control table. Then, when the auxiliary game ends, the normal operation status is changed to "1".

[Special operation processing]
Next, special operation processing regarding the control of the special figure display 81, the special figure pending display 83, and the big prize winning device 14D will be explained. As shown in FIG. 38, the processing regarding the special figure display 81, special figure reservation display 83, and big winning device 14D is divided into five statuses (stages). Then, "special operation status=1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of these statuses. The game control microcomputer 101 first checks the "special operation status" (S1501).

The game control microcomputer 101 performs special symbol standby processing (S1502) when the "special operation status" is "1", and when the "special operation status" is "2", the special symbol fluctuation Perform the process (S1503), and if the "special action status" is "3", perform the special symbol confirmation process (S1504), and if the "special action status" is "4", jackpot game control Processing (S1505) is performed, and if the "special operation status" is "5", gaming state setting processing (S1506) is performed. Note that the "special operation status" is initially set to "1".

The special symbol standby process (S1502) is a process that is performed during standby when variable display of special symbols and jackpot games are not being performed. The special symbol standby process will be detailed later.

The special symbol variation process (S1503) is a process performed when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The special symbol variation process will be detailed later.

The special symbol confirmation process (S1504) is a process performed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. The special symbol confirmation process will be detailed later.

The jackpot game control process (S1505) is a process performed in the jackpot game. The game control microcomputer 101 performs a jackpot game according to the jackpot game control table by performing jackpot game control processing. When the jackpot game ends, the special operation status is changed to "5". Note that when each round game is started, a round number designation command indicating the number of rounds is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. Further, when all the round games are finished and the ending is started, an ending command indicating the ending corresponding to the jackpot symbol related to the jackpot game is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the special operation status "4" and the state where the jackpot game is controlled is the "jackpot game state", and the setting of the special operation status "4" is called "jackpot". It is called "gaming state".

The game state setting process (S1506) is a process for setting the game state to be controlled after the jackpot game when the jackpot game ends. For example, when controlling in a high probability state after a jackpot game, the high probability flag is turned on in the high probability flag area of the gaming RAM 104 to set the high probability state. Furthermore, at this time, if the duration of the high probability state is to be limited, the duration is also set. For example, if the termination condition for the high probability state is the number of times the special figure variable display is executed, that number (hereinafter referred to as "high probability specified number of times") is set in the high probability remaining number of times counter provided in the gaming RAM 104. . In addition, when controlling in a time saving state after a jackpot game, the time saving flag is turned ON in the time saving flag area of the gaming RAM 104 to set the time saving state. Furthermore, at this time, if the duration of the time saving state is to be limited, the duration is also set. For example, when the end condition of the time saving state is the number of executions of the special figure variable display, the number of times (hereinafter referred to as "time saving specified number of times") is set in the remaining time saving number counter provided in the gaming RAM 104.

In addition, the gaming control microcomputer 101 sets a gaming status command indicating the gaming status after the jackpot game in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 in the gaming status setting process.

[Special symbol standby processing]
Next, the special symbol standby process will be explained using FIG. 39. In the special symbol standby process (S1502), first, it is determined whether the special symbol 2 pending number is "0" (S1601). If the special figure 2 reservation number is "0" (YES in S1601), that is, if there is no memory of the special figure 2 related judgment information acquired due to winning in the second starting opening 12, the special figure 2 related judgment information is not stored. It is determined whether the number of 1 reservations is "0" (S1608). Then, if the number of reserved special drawings 1 is also "0" (YES in S1608), that is, if there is no memory of the special drawing 1 related judgment information acquired due to winning in the first starting opening 11, It is determined whether the customer waiting flag is ON (S1618). Here, if the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S1618), the special symbol waiting process is finished, and if the customer waiting flag is not ON (NO in S1618), the customer waiting command is set in the output buffer (S1619). , turns on the customer waiting flag (S1620), and ends the special symbol waiting process.

In addition, if the number of special drawings 2 reserved is "0" but the number of special drawings 1 holding is not "0" (YES in S1601 and NO in S1608), that is, there is no special drawing 2 related determination information, but the first start If there is one or more stored pieces of special figure 1 related determination information acquired due to winning in the mouth 11, special figure 1 determination processing (S1609) and special figure 1 variation pattern determination processing (S1610) are performed.

In the special symbol 1 determination process (S1609), the first stored special symbol random number among the special symbol random numbers stored in the special symbol 1 pending storage unit 105a is read out, and the special symbol random number is read out based on the jackpot determination table associated with the gaming state. Then, a judgment is made as to whether it is a jackpot or a loss (jackpot judgment).

Here, if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the jackpot symbol type random number is read out and the jackpot symbol type is determined based on the first jackpot symbol type determination table (jackpot symbol type determination). Then, jackpot symbol data representing the jackpot symbol type is set in a special symbol buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104, and a symbol designation command representing the jackpot symbol type is set in the output buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104.

Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot determination is a "loss", loss symbol data representing a loss is set in the special pattern buffer, and a symbol designation command representing a loss is set in the output buffer.

Next, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process (S1610) will be explained using FIG. 40. In the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process, first, it is determined whether or not it is currently in a non-time saving state (S1651). If it is a non-time-saving state (YES in S1651), select the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the non-time-saving state (S1652) and proceed to step S1654; if it is not in a non-time-saving state (NO in S1651), the time-saving After selecting the state special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (S1653), the process advances to step S1654.

In step S1654, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether the jackpot determination result is a "jackpot". If it is not a jackpot (NO in S1654), the process advances to step S1655, and if it is a jackpot (YES in S1654), a jackpot symbol is selected from the special symbol 1 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653. After selecting the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (S1659), the process advances to step S1660.

In step S1655, the game control microcomputer 101 performs reach determination. In the reach determination, a reach random number is read out, and the reach random number is compared with a reach determination table according to the current gaming state (non-time saving state/time saving state) to determine whether there is a reach or no reach.

The game control microcomputer 101 next determines whether or not the result of the reach determination in step S1655 is "with reach" (S1656). If there is a reach (YES in S1656), select a special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table for loss with reach from the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653 (S1658). After that, the process advances to step S1660, and if there is no reach (NO in S1656), the current number of reserved special symbols 1 is checked, and the result is selected in the special symbol 1 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653. After selecting the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for no-reach loss according to the number of reserved special figures 1 (S1657), the process proceeds to step S1660.

In step S1660, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the special pattern variation pattern random number, and compares the special pattern variation pattern random number with the special pattern 1 variation pattern determination table selected in any of steps S1657 to S1659. Determine the special figure 1 variation pattern The special figure 1 variation pattern is determined. Next, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a special figure 1 variation start command indicating the determined special figure 1 variation pattern in the output buffer (S1661), and starts the special figure 1 variation according to the determined special figure 1 variation pattern. The time is set in the special operation timer (S1662), the special symbol 1 variation pattern determination process is ended, and the process returns to the special symbol standby process.

Note that the special operation timer is updated by 4ms in other processing in the game control side timer interrupt processing. In addition, the special figure 1 variation start command that is set includes information regarding the type of special symbol (that it is special figure 1) and information about the special figure variation pattern judgment performed in the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment process (S1610). Contains information about the results (information on special pattern fluctuation patterns, including information on whether there is a reach or not and special symbol fluctuation time).

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 causes the special pattern 1 display 81a to start displaying the special pattern 1 in a variable manner based on the special pattern variation time corresponding to the special pattern 1 variation pattern determined in step S1610 (S1611). .

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 shifts the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a from the current position to the side where it is read out, and also shifts the storage location (storage area) of the various counter values in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a Special figure 1 reservation storage section shift processing is performed to clear the storage area corresponding to the first reservation (the storage area farthest from the read side) (S1612). In this way, the special drawing 1 reservations are consumed in the order in which they were reserved.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 subtracts "1" from the special figure 1 reservation number counter (S1613), and changes the special figure 1 reservation number indicated by the special figure 1 reservation display 83a by decreasing it by "1" ( S1614), and changes the special operation status to "2" (S1615).

The game control microcomputer 101 then determines whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON (S1616), and if it is ON (YES in S1616), turns the customer waiting flag OFF (S1617), and performs special symbol waiting processing. If it is not ON (NO in S1616), the special symbol standby process ends without executing step S1617.

In addition, if the number of reserved special drawings 2 is not "0" in step S1601 (NO in S1601), that is, there is one or more stored special drawings 2 related judgment information acquired due to winning in the second starting port 12. If there is, special figure 2 determination processing (S1602) and special figure 2 variation pattern determination processing (S1603) are performed. The special figure 2 judgment process (S1602) and the special figure 2 variation pattern judgment process (S1603) are basically the same processing contents as the special figure 1 judgment process (S1609) and the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment process (S1610). .

The special figure 2 determination process (S1602) is basically the same except that the table used for jackpot determination is the second jackpot determination table, and the table used for jackpot symbol type determination is the second jackpot symbol type determination table. Since this is the same process as the special figure 1 determination process (S1609), the explanation will be omitted. Also, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process (S1603) is basically the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process (S1603), except that the table used in the special figure 2 variation pattern determination is the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. Since this process is similar to S1610), the explanation will be omitted.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 causes the special figure 2 display 81b to start variable display of the special figure 2 based on the special figure variation time according to the special figure variation pattern determined in step S1603 (S1604).

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 shifts the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b from the current position to the side where it is read out, and also shifts the storage location (storage area) of the various counter values in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b to Special figure 2 pending storage section shift processing is performed to clear the storage area corresponding to the fourth pending item (the storage area farthest from the read side) (S1605). In this way, the special drawing 2 reservations are consumed in the order in which they were reserved.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 subtracts "1" from the special map 2 reservation number counter (S1606), and changes the special map 2 reservation number indicated by the special map 2 reservation display 83b by decreasing it by "1" (S1607). ), the special operation status is changed to "2" (S1615), and the process advances to step S1616.

As described above, in the first embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the special symbol 1 reservation is performed only when the special symbol 2 reservation is "0" (YES in S1601). That is, the extinguishment of the special figure 2 reservation is executed in priority to the extinguishment of the special figure 1 reservation. In the first embodiment, it is easier for the player to win a jackpot symbol with a large profit in the lottery based on the special symbol 2 reservation than in the lottery based on the special symbol 1 reservation. In addition, the extinguishment of the special figure 1 reservation may be executed in priority to the extinguishment of the special figure 2 reservation. Moreover, the extinguishment of the special figure 1 hold and the extinguishment of the special figure 2 hold may be performed in the order in which the hold occurs, regardless of the type of special figure.

[Special symbol variation processing]
Next, the special symbol variation process will be explained using FIG. 41. In the special symbol variation process, the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not to end the variation display of the special symbol, that is, when the special symbol variation time set in the special operation timer in step S1603 or step S1610 has elapsed (special It is determined whether the operation counter=0) (S1701). If you do not want to end the fluctuating display of special symbols (NO in S1701), you can end the special symbol fluctuating process, and if you want to end the fluctuating display of special symbols (YES in S1701), you can display the fluctuating special symbols on the special symbol display 81. At the same time, special symbols are stopped and displayed according to the symbol data (jackpot symbol data or loss special symbol data) set in the special symbol buffer in step S1602 or step S1609 (S1702).

Next, a preset special symbol confirmation time (for example, 0.8 seconds) is set in the special operation timer (S1703), and a special symbol variation stop command indicating the end of the variation display of the special symbol is output to the buffer. (S1704), changes the special operation status to "3" (S1705), and ends the special symbol variation process.

[Special design confirmation process]
Next, the special symbol determination process will be explained using FIG. 42. In the special symbol confirmation process (S1504), the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not to end the stop display of the special symbol, that is, when the special symbol confirmation time set in the special operation timer in step S1703 has elapsed (special It is determined whether the operation counter=0) (S1751). If you do not want to end the special symbol stop display (NO in S1751), if you end the special symbol confirmation process and end the special symbol stop display (YES in S1751), you are currently in a normal probability state (high probability flag is OFF). It is determined whether or not (S1752).

If the game control microcomputer 101 is not currently in the normal probability state (NO in S1752), the process proceeds to step S1757, and if it is currently in the normal probability state (YES in S1752), it is in the time saving state (time saving flag is ON). It is determined whether or not (S1753). If the game control microcomputer 101 is not in the time-saving state (NO in S1753), the process advances to step S1757, and if it is currently in the time-saving state (YES in S1753), it displays the remaining variable displays of special symbols that can be executed in the time-saving state. The value of the remaining time saving number counter that measures the number of times (remaining number of time saving) is subtracted by "1" (S1754), and it is determined whether the value of the remaining time saving number counter is "0" (S1755). If the value of the remaining time saving counter (remaining number of time saving) is not "0" (NO in S1755), the process advances to step S1757, and if the value of the remaining time saving number counter (remaining number of time saving) is "0" (in S1755) YES), the time-saving state is shifted to a non-time-saving state (the time-saving flag is turned OFF) (S1756), and the process proceeds to step S1757.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 checks the current game state, sets a game state command indicating the game state in the output buffer (S1757), and determines whether the special symbol currently being stopped and displayed is a jackpot symbol. (S1758). If it is not a jackpot symbol (NO in S1758), change the special operation status to "1" (S1762), finish the special symbol confirmation process, and if it is a jackpot symbol (YES in S1758), reset the gaming state ( The normal gaming state is set. Specifically, the high probability flag and time saving flag are turned OFF, and the values of the high probability remaining number of times counter and time saving remaining number of times counter are set to "0") (S1759).

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a jackpot game preparation process (S1760), changes the special operation status to "4" (S1761), and ends the special symbol confirmation process. In the jackpot game preparation process, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a jackpot game control table corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104. In addition, a jackpot opening flag indicating that the opening is in progress according to the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed is turned on in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104, and a predetermined opening time (the jackpot game starts) is set according to the type of the jackpot symbol. Set the time from the time the game is played until the start of one round) to the special operation timer. Furthermore, in accordance with the type of jackpot symbol, an opening command indicating the type of jackpot symbol is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. The opening command corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol indicates that a jackpot game (opening of the jackpot game) corresponding to the type of the stopped and displayed jackpot symbol is started.

6. Control of production by production control board 120 [Production control main processing]
Next, the control of effects by the effect control board 120 will be explained using the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 43 to 47. Note that the flowchart for controlling the effects described below is an example. As for the plurality of processes in the flowchart, the order of execution can be changed as appropriate or the processes can be executed in parallel as long as there is no inconsistency in the process contents.

In addition, counters, timers, flags, buffers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the control of effects by the effect control board 120 below are provided in the effect RAM 124. When the pachinko game machine PY1 is powered on, the performance control microcomputer 121 provided in the performance control board 120 reads out the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 43 from the performance ROM 123 and executes it.

As shown in the figure, in the production control main process, first, a power-on process corresponding to power-on is performed (S4001). In the power-on process, for example, settings for the performance CPU 122, settings for SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time), etc. are performed.

Next, interrupts are prohibited (S4002), and random number seed update processing is executed (S4003). In the random number seed update process (S4003), the values of various performance determination random number counters for making determinations regarding various performances are updated. Note that the random numbers for performance determination include various random numbers for determining performance content, such as a random number for determining a stop symbol pattern and a random number for determining a special symbol variation performance pattern, which will be described later.

As an example, the method for updating the random number counter for judgment regarding various performances can be the same as the random number updating process performed by the game control board 100 described above. When updating, the random number values may be added by 2 instead of being added by 1. This also applies to the random number update process performed by the game control board 100 described above.

When the random number seed update process is completed, a command transmission process is executed (S4004). In the command transmission process, various commands stored in the output buffer in the performance RAM 124 of the performance control board 120 (for example, a special figure fluctuation performance start command, a customer waiting start command, an opening performance start command, a round performance start command, which will be described later) command, ending effect start command, etc.) to the image control board 140.

The image control board 140 that has received the command displays an image on the display section 50a (performs various effects using the image) in accordance with the received command. In addition to the various performances performed by the image control board 140, the production control board 120 also outputs audio from the speaker 52 via the audio control circuit 161 (executes various performances using audio), and controls the sub-drive board. 162 to cause the frame lamp 53 to emit light (to perform various effects by emitting light), and to operate the board movable body 55k (to perform various effects by movement). The various performances include a special figure variation performance, a jackpot game performance (jackpot opening performance, round performance, jackpot ending performance), customer waiting performance, operation performance, and pre-reading performance.

The performance control microcomputer 121 then permits an interrupt (S4005). Thereafter, steps S4002 to S4005 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, reception interrupt processing (S4010), 1ms timer interrupt processing (S4011), and 10ms timer interrupt processing (S4012) can be executed. The 1ms timer interrupt processing (S4011) and the 10ms timer interrupt processing (S4012) will be described later.

The reception interrupt process (S4010) is executed every time a strobe signal, that is, various commands sent from the game control board 100, is input to the external INT input section of the production control microcomputer 121. In the reception interrupt process (S4010), the production control microcomputer 121 stores various commands transmitted and received by the output process (S101) of the game control board 100 in the reception buffer of the production RAM 124. This reception interrupt processing is executed with priority over other interrupt processing (S4011, S4012).

[1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, 1ms timer interrupt processing will be explained using FIG. 44. The 1ms timer interrupt process (S4011) is executed every time an interrupt pulse of 1ms period is input to the production control board 120. The performance control microcomputer 121 first performs input processing (S4101) in the 1ms timer interrupt processing (S4011). In the input process, the production control microcomputer 121 creates first production button switch data based on the detection signal from the first production button sensor 40a. The performance control microcomputer 121 creates second performance button switch data based on the detection signal from the second performance button sensor 41a.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs light emission data output processing (S4102). In the light emission data output process, the effect control microcomputer 121 uses the light emission data created in the light emission data creation process (S4203) in the 10ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in order to cause the frame lamp 53 to emit light at a timing that matches the image effect, etc. is output to the sub-drive board 162. That is, the performance control microcomputer 121 causes the frame lamp 53 to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode according to the light emission data.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs a movable device control process (S4103). In the movable device control process, the performance control microcomputer 121 creates or outputs drive data (data for driving the movable board 55k) in order to drive the movable board 55k at a predetermined timing. That is, the performance control microcomputer 121 drives the board movable body 55k in a predetermined operation mode according to the drive data.

Next, the production control microcomputer 121 performs a timer update process (S4104). In the timer update process, various timers provided in the performance RAM 124, which will be described later, are updated in order to manage and control time related to various predetermined performances. In this process, the timer provided in the effect RAM 124 is updated by 1 msec.

Then, the production control microcomputer 121 performs watchdog timer processing to reset the watchdog timer (S4105), and ends the 1ms timer interrupt processing.

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, 10ms timer interrupt processing will be explained using FIG. 45. The 10ms timer interrupt process (S4012) is executed every time an interrupt pulse with a period of 10msec is input to the production control board 120. In the 10ms timer interrupt process, the production control microcomputer 121 first performs a received command analysis process to analyze the command stored in the receive buffer in step S4010 (S4201). The received command analysis process will be described in detail in the first embodiment below.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs audio control processing (S4202). In the audio control process, audio data (data that controls the output of audio from the speaker 52) is created and sent to the audio control circuit 161 based on the performance content indicated by the special figure variation performance data set in the performance RAM 124. is output.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs a light emission data creation process (S4203). In the light emission data creation process, light emission data is created based on the performance contents indicated by the special symbol variation performance data set in the performance RAM 124, and the like.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis process will be explained using FIGS. 46 and 47. In the received command analysis process, the performance control microcomputer 121 first determines whether or not it has received a start winning command (first start winning command or second start winning command) from the gaming control board 100, in other words, it has received a start winning command. It is determined whether the data has been stored in the buffer (S4301). If the performance control microcomputer 121 has received the start winning command (YES in S4301), it proceeds to step S4302, whereas if it has not received the start winning command (NO in S4301), it proceeds to step S4303.

In step S4302, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs a starting winning process in response to the game ball winning in the first starting opening 11 or the second starting opening 12. In the starting winning process, the received starting winning command is stored in the starting winning command pending storage section 125 in the performance RAM 124. Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 analyzes the stored starting winning command and determines whether or not to execute a pre-read performance that indicates the expected level of jackpot. In addition to a pending notice in which a pending icon is displayed in a special manner, the pre-reading effect includes a continuous notice effect that is performed over a plurality of consecutive variable displays of special symbols. When it is decided to execute these pre-read effects, a pre-read effect start command for executing the decided effects is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

When the prefetch effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is sent to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 starts the predetermined effect from the image ROM 142. The image is read out and a pre-read effect using the image is performed on the display section 50a of the image display device 50. In addition, while the image control board 140 is performing the prefetch effect using images, the effect control microcomputer 121 controls audio according to the prefetch effect content indicated by the prefetch effect start command sent to the image control board 140. The sound is output from the speaker 52 via the circuit 161 (executing a pre-reading performance using audio), and the frame lamp 53 is made to emit light via the sub-drive board 162 (executing a pre-reading performance using light emission), and the board movable body It is possible to operate 55k (execute a look-ahead effect by operation).

In step S4303, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether the symbol designation command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the symbol designation command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the production control microcomputer 121 has not received the symbol designation command (NO in S4303), the process proceeds to step S4305, while if it has received the symbol designation command (YES in S4303), the production control microcomputer 121 transfers the symbol designation command to the production RAM 124. The symbol designation command is stored in the symbol designation command storage section 126 (S4304).

In step S4305, the production control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation start command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the special figure fluctuation start command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the special figure variation start command has not been received (NO in S4305), the process proceeds to step S4307, while if the special figure variation start command has been received (YES in S4305), the production contents of the special figure variation production are determined. , performs a special figure variation effect start process (S4306) for starting the special figure variation effect.

In the special figure variation production start process, the production control microcomputer 121 first stores a special figure variation start command in the special figure variation start command storage unit 127 in the production RAM 124. Next, based on the contents of the stop special symbol (type of jackpot symbol, losing special symbol) indicated by the symbol designation command already stored in step S4304 and the special symbol fluctuation pattern indicated by the special symbol fluctuation start command, the production symbol EZ1 is stopped and displayed. -EZ3, and a stop symbol pattern determination table for performing a stop symbol determination for determining small symbols KZ1 to KZ3. A plurality of stop symbol pattern determination tables are provided in association with special symbols and special symbol variation patterns. Therefore, the performance control microcomputer 121 selects one stop symbol pattern determination table associated with the stop special symbol and the special symbol fluctuation pattern. In each stop symbol pattern determination table, the values of random numbers for stopping symbol pattern determination (stop symbol pattern determination value) are distributed. Next, the production control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the stop symbol pattern determination random number counter as a stop symbol pattern determination random number, and performs a stop symbol pattern determination based on the acquired stop symbol pattern determination random number.

In the stop symbol pattern determination, the performance control microcomputer 121 collates the acquired random number for stop symbol pattern determination with the selected stop symbol pattern table and determines the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 to be stopped and displayed. Then, data representing the determined performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are set in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124. For example, if the special symbol variation pattern is a no-reach variation, a combination of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is selected so as to result in a so-called "missing pattern". In addition, if the special symbol variation pattern is a reach/loss variation, the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to The KZ3 combination is selected. Furthermore, if the special symbol variation pattern is a jackpot variation, a combination of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is selected to form a so-called "Zero" according to the production mode and the type of jackpot symbol. .

Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 generates a special figure fluctuation performance pattern in which the performance contents of the special figure fluctuation performance are associated, based on the performance mode in which it is staying and the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the special figure fluctuation start command. Select a special figure variation performance pattern determination table for determining the special figure variation performance pattern to be determined. A plurality of special figure variation performance pattern determination tables are provided in association with production modes and special figure variation patterns. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 121 selects one special symbol variation production pattern determination table that is associated with the special symbol variation pattern. In each special figure fluctuation performance pattern judgment table, the value of the random number for special figure fluctuation performance pattern judgment (special figure fluctuation performance pattern Judgment values) are distributed. Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the random number counter for special figure fluctuation performance pattern determination as a random number for special figure fluctuation performance pattern determination, and selects a special figure based on the acquired random number for special figure fluctuation performance pattern determination. Performs fluctuation performance pattern judgment.

In the special pattern variation performance pattern determination, the performance control microcomputer 121 collates the acquired special pattern variation performance pattern determination random number with the selected special pattern variation performance pattern table, determines the special pattern variation performance pattern, and determines the special pattern variation performance pattern. Data representing the special figure fluctuation performance pattern thus obtained is set in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124, and a special figure fluctuation performance start command indicating the special figure fluctuation performance pattern is set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124.

When the special figure variation effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 executes a predetermined command from the image ROM 142. The effect image is read out, and a special figure variation effect is performed using the image on the display section 50a of the image display device 50.

In addition, the special figure variation performance start command includes information regarding the production flow associated with the special figure variation pattern indicated by the special figure variation start command. In addition, the special figure variation effect start command includes, in addition to the special figure variation effect using images performed on the image display device 50, the special figure variation effect using audio output from the speaker 52, and the special figure variation effect using light emitted from the frame lamp 53. It includes the performance content of the figure variation performance and the performance content of the special figure variation performance based on the operation performed by the board movable body 55k.

In addition, the production control microcomputer 121 controls the special symbol variation production content indicated by the special symbol variation production start command sent to the image control board 140 while the special symbol variation production using images is being performed by the image control board 140. In response to this, the speaker 52 outputs audio via the audio control circuit 161 (executes a special figure variation effect using audio), and causes the frame lamp 53 to emit light via the sub-drive board 162 (executes a special figure variation effect by emitting light). (performs a variable effect), and operates the board movable body 55k (executes a special figure variable effect by operation).

In step S4307, the production control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the special symbol fluctuation stop command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the special symbol fluctuation stop command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the production control microcomputer 121 has not received the special symbol fluctuation stop command (NO in S4307), the process proceeds to step S4309, while if it has received the special symbol fluctuation stop command (YES in S4307), the special symbol fluctuation stops. A special symbol variation performance end process (S4308) is performed to end the performance (stop the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 and perform a stop display).

In the special pattern fluctuation performance end process, the performance control microcomputer 121 analyzes the special pattern fluctuation stop command, and ends the special pattern fluctuation performance appropriately based on the analysis result (performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3, and small pattern KZ1). A special figure fluctuation performance end command for stopping the fluctuation display of KZ3 is set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124. When the image control board 140 receives the special symbol variation production end command, it ends the special symbol variation production that is being executed (stops the variation production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3).

In step S4309, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the game state command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the game state command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the production control microcomputer 121 has not received the gaming state command (NO in S4309), it proceeds to step S4311, whereas if it has received the gaming state command (YES in S4309), it analyzes the gaming state command. , identifies the gaming state represented by the gaming state command, and performs a gaming state setting process for setting the gaming state (S4310).

The production control microcomputer 121 sets a gaming state flag corresponding to the gaming state indicated by the gaming state command in the gaming state flag area of the production RAM 124 in the gaming state setting process. For example, the production control microcomputer 121 sets the gaming state flag "00H" in the gaming state flag area of the production RAM 124 if the gaming state indicated by the gaming state command is the normal gaming state. Further, the production control microcomputer 121 sets a gaming state flag "01H" in the gaming state flag area of the production RAM 124 if the gaming state indicated by the gaming state command is a high probability high base gaming state. Further, the performance control microcomputer 121 sets a gaming state flag "02H" in the gaming state flag area of the performance RAM 124 if the gaming state indicated by the gaming state command is a low probability high base gaming state.

In step S4311, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a customer waiting command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the customer waiting command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the performance control microcomputer 121 has not received the customer waiting command (NO in S4311), the process proceeds to step S4313, whereas if it has received the customer waiting command (YES in S4311), it performs a customer waiting performance standby process. (S4312), the received command analysis process ends.

In the customer waiting performance standby process, the performance control microcomputer 121 controls the waiting time (customer waiting performance waiting time: for example, 20 seconds) from the stop display of the performance pattern to the start of the customer waiting performance. Set it on a timer. Note that the performance control microcomputer 121 can determine whether or not this waiting time has elapsed, and if it determines that the waiting time has elapsed, it sends a customer waiting performance start command to the performance RAM 124 to start the customer waiting performance. set in the output buffer of

In step S4313, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether the opening command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the opening command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the production control microcomputer 121 has not received the opening command (NO in S4313), the process proceeds to step S4315, whereas if the opening command has been received (YES in S4313), the production control microcomputer 121 executes the jackpot with the start of the opening of the jackpot game. Opening performance start processing is performed (S4314).

In the jackpot opening production start process, the production control microcomputer 121 analyzes the opening command, and based on the analysis result, determines whether to execute the jackpot opening production according to the opening of the jackpot game to be executed from now on. If it is to be executed, select the performance content of the jackpot opening performance (jackpot opening performance pattern), and output a jackpot opening performance start command to the performance RAM 124 to start the jackpot opening performance with the selected jackpot opening performance pattern. Set in buffer.

In step S4315, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the number of rounds designation command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the number of rounds designation command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the number of rounds designation command has not been received (NO in S4315), the process proceeds to step S4317, while if the number of rounds designation command has been received (YES in S4315), round production start processing is performed in conjunction with the start of the round game. (S4316).

In the round performance start process, the performance control microcomputer 121 analyzes the number of rounds designation command, determines whether or not to execute a round performance according to the round game to be started from now on, and if it is to be executed, executes the round performance. The performance content (round performance pattern) is selected, and a round performance start command corresponding to the selected round performance pattern is set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124.

In step S4317, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether the ending command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the ending command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the ending command has not been received (NO in S4317), the received command analysis process is finished, while if the ending command has been received (YES in S4317), the jackpot ending performance start process ( After performing S4318) and production mode setting processing (S4319), the received command analysis processing ends.

In the jackpot ending production start process, the production control microcomputer 121 analyzes the ending command and determines whether or not to execute the jackpot ending production according to the ending of the jackpot game that will be executed from now on. The performance content (jackpot ending performance pattern) of the jackpot ending performance is selected, and a jackpot ending performance start command corresponding to the selected jackpot ending performance pattern is set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124.

In addition, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs a process of setting the performance mode after the jackpot game (setting the performance mode) based on the analysis result of the ending command, specifically, the jackpot symbol indicated by the ending command, in the performance mode setting process. control processing).

For example, when the jackpot symbols indicated by the jackpot ending command are jackpot symbols A, B, or jackpot symbols D, E, the performance control microcomputer 121 sets the performance to a probability variable performance mode that suggests a high probability high base game state. Then, a performance mode flag indicating the variable probability performance mode is turned on in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124, and a variable probability performance mode start command indicating setting of the variable probability performance mode is set in the output buffer of the RAM 124 for performance. When the variable performance mode start command set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 executes the command at the timing when the ending ends. , displays the background image G120 for probability variation as a background image, and outputs the BGM for probability variation as BGM.

Further, the performance control microcomputer 121 sets a time-saving performance mode that suggests a low probability high base gaming state when the jackpot symbol indicated by the jackpot ending command is the jackpot symbol C or the jackpot symbol F. Then, the performance control microcomputer 121 turns on the performance mode flag indicating the time-saving performance mode in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124, and sends a time-saving performance mode start command indicating that the time-saving performance mode is set to the output buffer of the performance RAM 124. Set to . When the time-saving production mode start command set in the output buffer of the production RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 executes the command at the timing when the ending ends. , the time-saving background image G130 is displayed as the background image, and the time-saving BGM is output as the BGM.

<First embodiment>
Next, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the basic embodiment of the present invention described above. In the following, differences from the basic embodiment will be mainly described as the first embodiment. Furthermore, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those in the basic embodiment or similarly corresponding configurations.

First, the main features of the first embodiment will be explained from the perspective of gameplay. In the basic embodiment, either a "big hit" or a "loss" is determined in the jackpot determination, but in the first embodiment, a "small win" is determined in addition to a "big hit" or a "loss". Sometimes it is done. In other words, in the first embodiment, a "small win" that was not determined in the jackpot determination in the basic embodiment is provided.

The details will be described later, but if a "small hit" is determined as a result of the jackpot determination, the special pattern fluctuation pattern will be determined in the same way as when it is determined to be a "big hit" and "loss". Then, a special figure variable display is performed based on the special figure variation pattern. In the special figure variable display, the "small winning symbol" which indicates that the player has won the "small winning" is finally displayed in a stopped state. That is, in the special figure variable display, a "small hit" is derived as a jackpot determination result. Then, when the small winning symbols are stopped and displayed, a small winning game is executed.

In the small winning game, the large prize opening 14 is opened. That is, the small winning game is a game that involves opening the large prize opening 14. A gaming state in which a small winning game is being played is sometimes referred to as a "small winning gaming state." In the small winning game state, the large winning hole 14 with a larger number of prize balls opens compared to the first starting hole 11 and the second starting hole 12, so the small winning game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. It can also be positioned as a gaming state. In addition, in the small winning game state, execution of the special figure variable display is regulated, specifically prohibited. Then, when the small winning game state ends, it becomes possible to start a new special figure variable display. Details of the small winning game state will be described later.

In addition, in the basic embodiment, a non-time saving state and a time saving state are provided as game states related to the ease of opening (easiness of opening) of the second starting port 12, and it is relatively easy for the player to The advantageous time-saving state was set in response to winning a jackpot and ending the jackpot gaming state. That is, the end of the jackpot game state (jackpot winning or stop display of jackpot symbols) is set as the trigger for the occurrence of the time saving state. However, in the first embodiment, in addition to the end of the jackpot game state, a stop display of a small winning symbol or a stop display of a losing symbol is provided as a trigger for setting the time saving state.

In the first embodiment, only one type of small winning symbol is provided, so when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the time saving state is always set in accordance with the stopped display. On the other hand, there are four types of losing symbols: losing symbol A, losing symbol B, losing symbol C, and losing symbol D. Depending on the stop display of losing symbol B or the stop display of losing symbol C, time is reduced. The state is set.

In this way, the time saving state is set according to the stop display of the small winning symbol, the stop display of the losing symbol B, and the stopping display of the losing symbol C, so the small winning symbol, the losing symbol B, and the losing symbol C are It can be positioned as a special symbol that can set a time saving state.

In addition, in the first embodiment, a jackpot determination based on winning in the first starting hole 11, in other words, a "small hit" may be determined only in the jackpot determination related to the special drawing 1 variable display, and the second starting hole In the jackpot determination based on winning in the mouth 12, in other words, in the jackpot determination related to the special drawing 2 variable display, a "small hit" is not determined. Further, the losing symbol that can set the time saving state is determined only when the jackpot determination based on the winning in the first starting opening 11 is determined as a "losing" symbol. Therefore, basically, in a situation where the player is hitting the left hand aiming to win the first starting opening 11 in a non-time saving state, the time saving state can be generated regardless of the jackpot gaming state.

Next, various tables used by the game control microcomputer 101 for game control, tables that are different from the basic embodiment, and tables that are not used in the basic embodiment will be explained. Tables different from the basic embodiment are the jackpot determination table, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table, and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. Tables that were not used in the basic embodiment include a losing symbol type determination table, a gaming state setting table related to the stop display of small winning symbols, a small winning game control table, and a gaming state setting related to the stopping display of losing symbols. There's a table.

First, the jackpot determination table will be explained. In the first embodiment, the jackpot determination is performed when the special figure 1 variable display is performed based on the winning in the first starting opening 11, and the jackpot determination is performed when the special drawing 2 variable display is performed based on the winning in the second starting opening 12. Different jackpot judgment tables are used for jackpot judgment. Hereinafter, the former will be referred to as the "Special Figure 1 Jackpot Determination Table" and the latter will be referred to as the "Special Figure 2 Jackpot Determination Table." In addition, below, the jackpot determination related to the special figure 1 variable display will be referred to as the "special figure 1 jackpot determination." In addition, the jackpot determination related to the special figure 2 variable display is referred to as "special figure 2 jackpot determination."

FIG. 48(A) is an example of the configuration of the special pattern 1 jackpot determination table, and FIG. 48(B) is a configuration example of the special pattern 2 jackpot determination table. Both the special figure 1 jackpot determination table and the special figure 2 jackpot determination table include a table used in the normal probability state and a table used in the high probability state, as in the basic embodiment. That is, the special figure 1 jackpot determination table includes a special figure 1 jackpot determination table for normal probability state and a special figure 1 jackpot determination table for high probability state, and the special figure 2 jackpot determination table includes a special figure 1 jackpot determination table for normal probability state. There is a special figure 2 jackpot determination table for use and a special figure 2 jackpot determination table for high probability state.

As shown in FIG. 48(A), in each special figure 1 jackpot judgment table, the judgment value of the special symbol random number (special symbol random number judgment value) is appropriately set for each of the jackpot judgment results, ie, jackpot, small hit, and loss. are divided into. Therefore, when a jackpot determination is made on each special figure 1 jackpot determination table, it is determined to be a jackpot, a small hit, or a loss. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 48(B), in each special figure 2 jackpot determination table, special symbol random number determination values are appropriately distributed to each of the jackpot determination results, ie, jackpot and loss. Therefore, when a jackpot determination is made in each special figure 2 jackpot determination table, it is determined to be either a jackpot or a loss, but it is not determined to be a small hit.

Next, the losing symbol type determination table will be explained. As described above, in the first embodiment, a plurality of types of losing symbols are provided. In the following, the type of losing symbol will be referred to as a "losing symbol type." The loss symbol type determination table is a table for determining the loss symbol type when the result of jackpot determination is a loss. Similar to the jackpot symbol type determination table, the losing symbol type determination table also includes a losing symbol type determining table (special symbol 1 losing symbol type determination table) used when performing the special symbol 1 variable display, and a special symbol 2 variable display. There is a losing symbol type determination table (special figure 2 losing symbol type determining table) used when performing. Note that, hereinafter, determining the losing symbol type using the losing symbol type determination table will be referred to as "losing symbol type determination". Furthermore, determining the losing symbol type using the special pattern 1 losing symbol type determination table is referred to as "special pattern 1 losing symbol type determination," and determining the losing symbol type using the special symbol 2 losing symbol type determination table. This process is called "Special Figure 2 Loss Symbol Type Judgment".

Here, the losing symbol type determination will be explained. Similar to the jackpot symbol type determination, the losing symbol type determination is also performed by comparing the random number for jackpot symbol type determination with the losing symbol type determination table. That is, a common random number is used in the jackpot symbol type determination and the loss symbol type determination. Therefore, in the first embodiment, the "random number for jackpot symbol type determination" described in the basic embodiment is referred to as "random number for symbol type determination".

In the first embodiment, three types of losing symbols, namely losing symbols A, losing symbols B, and C, are provided as losing symbols related to the special pattern 1, and one of the losing symbols D is provided as a losing symbol related to the special pattern 2. There are different types of losing symbols. Then, as shown in FIG. 48(C), in each losing symbol type determination table, the symbol type random number is determined for each losing symbol type so that the selection rate for each losing symbol type is as shown in FIG. 48(C). Values (symbol type random number determination values) are appropriately distributed.

Next, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table will be explained. In the basic embodiment, each of the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table was associated with the gaming state related to the ease of opening the second starting port 12. In other words, the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table includes a special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table for non-time-saving states, a special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table for time-saving states, and a special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table. There were a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for non-time-saving states and a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for time-saving states. In the first embodiment, the basic structure of the special figure variation pattern determination table is the same, but the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the time saving state is further divided. Specifically, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the time-saving state is associated with the trigger of the time-saving state, and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the time-saving state after the jackpot game state (first time-saving state (Special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table for the second time-saving state) and special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table for the time-saving state after the small winning symbol stop display and after the loss symbol B stop display (Special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table for the second time-saving state) table), and a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the time-saving state after the losing symbol C is stopped and displayed (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the third time-saving state).

Here, each special figure fluctuation pattern determination table associated with the gaming state and the opportunity of the gaming state will be explained. FIG. 49(A) is an example of the configuration of the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state, FIG. 49(B) is an example of the configuration of the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the time saving state, and FIG. A) is a configuration example of the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state, FIG. 50(B) is a configuration example of the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the first time saving state, and FIG. ) is a configuration example of the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the second time saving state, and FIG. 51(B) is a configuration example of the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the third time saving state.

As shown in FIGS. 49(A) and 49(B), the jackpot determination results are included in the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for non-time-saving states and the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for time-saving states. In addition to the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table when it is a jackpot and the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table when the jackpot judgment result is a loss, the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table when the jackpot judgment result is a small hit. Also includes a table. This is because, as described above, in the first embodiment, a "small hit" is included in the determination result of the special figure 1 jackpot determination.

In addition, the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table when the jackpot judgment result is a loss includes the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table for the loss pattern A (special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table for the loss pattern A), and the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table for the loss pattern A. Special figure 1 variation pattern determination table in case of symbol B (special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for losing symbol B) and special figure 1 variation pattern determination table in case of losing symbol C (special symbol 1 variation pattern for losing symbol C) There is a judgment table). This is because, as mentioned above, in the first embodiment, there are multiple types of losing symbols, and depending on the type of losing symbol, a time-saving state advantageous to the player occurs after the losing symbol is stopped and displayed. This is to secure a certain amount of special figure variation time and to reliably execute the special figure variation performance that increases the player's expectations. Therefore, the reach determination result is not associated with the special pattern 1 variation pattern determination table for losing symbol B and the special symbol 1 variation pattern determination table for losing symbol C, and as in the case of a jackpot, the special symbol 1 variation As a pattern determination result, the special figure 1 variation pattern in which the special figure variation performance ends with normal variation is not included. On the other hand, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for loss pattern A is associated with reach determination results, and similar to the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for loss for non-time saving states in the basic embodiment, Furthermore, there is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for losing symbols A when there is a reach, and a special symbol 1 varying pattern determination table for losing symbols A when there is no reach.

Next, a gaming state setting table for newly setting (changing) a gaming state will be explained. In the basic embodiment, when a new gaming state is set (changed) in response to the termination of a jackpot gaming state, the game state is set based on the gaming state setting table associated with the jackpot symbol type related to the jackpot gaming state. The gaming state has been newly set (changed). In the first embodiment, the same applies when the gaming state is newly set (changed) in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state. When the gaming state is newly set (changed) in response to the stopped display of a small winning symbol, and when the gaming state is newly set (changed) in response to the stopped display of a losing symbol, basically, The gaming state is newly set (changed) based on the gaming state setting table.

When the game state is newly set (changed) according to the stop display of the small winning symbol, the game state setting table includes the small winning symbol stop display when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the non-time saving state. (game state setting table for non-time saving small winning symbol stop display) and gaming state setting table for small winning symbol stop display when the small winning symbol is stopped displaying in the time saving state (game state setting table for small winning symbol stop display) There is a game state setting table for displaying winning symbols. That is, the gaming state is associated with the gaming state setting table related to the stop display of small winning symbols.

FIG. 52(A) is a configuration example of a game state setting table for non-time-saving small winning symbol stop display, and FIG. 52(B) is a configuration example of a gaming state setting table for time-saving small winning symbol stop display. As shown in FIGS. 52(A) and 52(B), according to the game state setting table for non-time saving small winning symbol stop display, the time saving state is set according to the stop display of the small winning symbol, but According to the game state setting table for stopping display of winning symbols, the time saving state is not set in response to the stopping display of small winning symbols.

In addition, in the gaming state setting table (gaming state setting table for losing symbol stop display) when the gaming state is newly set (changed) in response to the stop display of losing symbols, the stop display of losing symbols is included in the non-time saving state. A gaming state setting table for stopping display of losing symbols when the game is executed (gaming state setting table for stopping displaying losing symbols for non-time saving) and a gaming state for displaying losing symbols stop when the stopping display of losing symbols is performed in the time saving state There is a setting table (gaming state setting table for time saving loss symbol stop display). FIG. 52(C) is a configuration example of a game state setting table for non-time-saving loss symbol stop display, and FIG. 52(D) is a configuration example of a game state setting table for time-saving loss symbol stop display. That is, the gaming state is associated with the gaming state setting table related to the stop display of losing symbols.

Furthermore, the gaming state setting table for non-time-saving losing symbol stop display includes a gaming state setting table for non-time-saving losing symbol stop display in the case of losing symbol B (gaming state setting table for non-time-saving losing symbol B stop display), There is a gaming state setting table for non-time-saving losing symbol stop display when it is a losing symbol C (gaming state setting table for non-time-saving losing symbol C stop display), and the gaming state setting table for time-saving losing symbol stop display is as follows: A game state setting table for time-saving losing symbol stop display when the losing symbol is B (gaming state setting table for time-saving losing symbol stop display) and a gaming state setting table for time-saving losing symbol stop display when the losing symbol is C ( There is a game state setting table for time-saving losing symbol C stop display). That is, in the gaming state setting table related to the stop display of losing symbols, the gaming state and the losing symbol type are associated.

As shown in FIGS. 52(C) and 52(D), according to the gaming state setting table for non-time-saving losing symbol B stop display and the gaming state setting table for non-time-saving losing symbol C stop display, the stopping of losing symbol B The time-saving state is set according to the display and losing symbol C, but according to the game state setting table for time-saving losing symbol B stop display and the gaming state setting table for time-saving losing symbol C stop display, the stop display of losing symbol B and The time saving state is not set in response to the stop display of the losing symbol C.

In this way, the jackpot determination result is associated with the gaming state setting table for newly setting (changing) the gaming state. The gaming state setting table relating to the small win and the gaming state setting table relating to the loss are associated with the gaming state when the special figure stop display is performed. Further, symbol types are associated with the gaming state setting table relating to jackpots and the gaming state setting table relating to losses.

In addition, the conditions for ending the time-saving state when the time-saving state is set in response to the stop display of the small winning symbol, and the end conditions for the time-saving state when the time-saving state is set in response to the stop display of the losing symbol B. is set to "Special figure variable display 150 times". That is, the time-saving state ends when the variable display of special symbols is executed 150 times without winning a jackpot, and the state becomes a non-time-saving gaming state. On the other hand, when the time saving state is set in response to the stop display of the losing symbol C, the end condition of the time saving state is set to "special pattern variable display 50 times". That is, the time-saving state ends when the variable display of special symbols is executed 50 times without winning a jackpot, and the state becomes a non-time-saving gaming state.

Next, the small winning game control table will be explained. The small winning game control table is a table used to control a small winning game in which a small winning game is played. Small winning games include an opening game that involves opening and closing the big prize opening 14, an opening (also referred to as OP) from the start of the small winning game until the start of the first opening game, and an opening game in the final round. It includes an ending (also referred to as ED) from the end of the game until the end of the small winning game. Each open game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous open game, and ends with the start of the next open game or the start of the ending. Furthermore, the period from the start of the opening to the end of the ending with the open game in between constitutes a small winning game.

FIG. 53 shows a configuration example of the small winning game control table. The small winning game control table stores elements constituting the small winning game (small winning game constituent elements). The small winning game components include the number of opening games, the opening time of the big prize opening for each opening game (opening pattern), the opening time (opening time), and the ending time (ending time), etc. There is. In addition, when there are multiple types of small winning games, it is possible to set small winning game components for each type of small winning games.

According to the small winning game control table, the open game is played once. In the first embodiment, the big prize opening 14 is opened for 1.8 seconds in the open game. Further, from the start of the small winning game until the start of the first opening game, an opening is performed in which the big winning opening 14 is kept closed for 2.0 seconds. Furthermore, an ending is performed in which the big prize opening 14 is kept closed for 0.5 seconds from the end of the last open game until the end of the small winning game.

Next, processes performed by the game control microcomputer 101 that differ from the basic embodiment and processes that were not performed in the basic embodiment will be described. Processing that differs from the basic embodiment is special movement processing, special pattern 1 judgment processing of special symbol standby processing in special movement processing, special pattern 1 variation pattern judgment processing, special pattern 2 judgment processing, and special pattern 2 variation pattern. These are the determination process and the special symbol confirmation process in the special operation process. On the other hand, as processes that are not performed in the basic embodiment, there are a game state setting process after small winning symbol display, a small winning game control process, and a game state setting process after losing symbol display in the special operation process.

First, special operation processing will be explained. Special operation processing according to the first embodiment will be explained. A flowchart of the special operation process is shown in FIG. In the special operation process according to the first embodiment, the process regarding the special figure display 81, special figure pending display 83, and big winning device 14D is divided into eight statuses (stages). Then, "special operation status=1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8" is assigned to each of these statuses.

The game control microcomputer 101 performs special symbol standby processing (S1502) when the "special operation status" is "1", and when the "special operation status" is "2", special symbol fluctuation is performed. Perform the process (S1503), and if the "special action status" is "3", perform the special symbol confirmation process (S1504), and if the "special action status" is "4", jackpot game control Processing (S1505) is performed, and if the "special operation status" is "5", the game state setting process after jackpot game (S1506) is performed, and if the "special operation status" is "6", After the small winning symbol is displayed, the game status setting process (S1507) is performed, and if the "special operation status" is "7", the small winning game control process (S1508) is performed, and the "special operation status" is set to "8". If so, a game state setting process (S1509) is performed after losing symbols are displayed. Note that the "special operation status" is initially set to "1".

The "special symbol fluctuation processing", "jackpot game control processing", and "game state setting processing after jackpot gaming state" according to the first embodiment are the same as the "special symbol fluctuation processing", "jackpot game control processing" according to the basic embodiment. The processing contents are the same as "control processing" and "gaming state setting processing". Note that the process related to "special operation status = 5" is "gaming state setting process after jackpot game", and although the name is different from the name in the basic embodiment, this is a process in which the gaming state is changed to a new state in the first embodiment. This is because the name was changed in response to an increase in the number of opportunities to set (change) ``special operation status = 5'', and the processing contents for ``special operation status = 5'' are generally the same. In addition, in the "special symbol standby process" according to the first embodiment, "special symbol 1 determination process", "special symbol 1 variation pattern determination process", "special symbol 2 determination process", and "special symbol 2 variation pattern determination process" ”, and “special symbol confirmation processing” are “special symbol 1 determination processing”, “special symbol 1 variation pattern determination processing”, and “special symbol 2 determination processing” in “special symbol standby processing” according to the basic embodiment. , "Special symbol 2 variation pattern determination process", and "Special symbol confirmation process" are different in processing content. Details of these processes will be described later.

The game state setting process after small winning symbol display (S1507) is a process for newly setting (changing) the gaming state when the small winning symbol is determined after the stop display of the small winning symbol ends.

The small winning game control process (S1508) is a process performed in the small winning game. The game control microcomputer 101 performs a small winning game control process, thereby performing a small winning game according to the small winning game control table. In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the special operation status "7" to indicate that the state in which the small winning game is controlled is the "small winning game state" and the special operation status "7" is set. This is called the "small winning game state."

The game state setting process after losing symbol stop display (S1509) is performed when the stop display of losing symbol B and the losing symbol C are completed in the non-time saving state and losing symbol B and losing symbol C are confirmed. This is the process of setting the gaming state.

Although the details will be described later, the "special operation status" is changed to "6" in the special symbol confirmation process when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, the "special operation status" is changed to "8" in the special symbol confirmation process when the losing symbol B is stopped and displayed and when the losing symbol C is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the game state setting process ends after the small winning symbol is displayed, the "special operation status" is changed to "7", and when the game state setting process ends after the losing symbol stops, the "special operation status" is changed to "7". It is changed to "1". Furthermore, when the small winning game control process ends, the "special operation status" is changed to "1".

Next, the special symbol 1 determination process and the special symbol 1 variation pattern determination process in the special symbol standby process will be explained. First, the special figure 1 determination process will be explained. FIG. 55 shows a flowchart of the special figure 1 determination process. As shown in FIG. 55, in the special figure 1 determination process, the game control microcomputer 101 first determines, as step S1621, whether the current gaming state related to the jackpot probability is the normal probability state. When determining that the game control microcomputer 101 is in the normal probability state, in step S1622, it selects the special chart 1 jackpot determination table for the normal probability state, while determining that it is not in the normal probability state, that is, in the high probability state. Then, in step S1623, the special chart 1 jackpot determination table for high probability state is selected.

When the game control microcomputer 101 selects the special pattern 1 jackpot determination table, in step S1624, it performs the special pattern 1 jackpot determination based on the selected special pattern 1 jackpot determination table. In the special pattern 1 jackpot determination, the game control microcomputer 101 reads the first stored special symbol random number stored in the special pattern 1 reservation storage section 105a, and determines the selected special pattern 1 jackpot. It is checked against the table to determine whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss.

In step S1625, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the result of the special drawing 1 jackpot determination is a jackpot. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is a jackpot, it selects the special pattern 1 jackpot symbol type determination table in step S1626, and performs the special pattern 1 jackpot symbol type determination in step S1627.

When determining the special pattern 1 jackpot symbol type, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the earliest stored random number of the symbol types stored in the special pattern 1 reservation storage section 105a, and selects the special pattern 1 jackpot symbol. It is checked against the type determination table to determine which jackpot symbol type it is. When the game control microcomputer 101 performs the special drawing 1 jackpot symbol type determination, in step S1628, it sets a symbol type flag indicating the jackpot symbol type that is the determination result in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104, and in step S1629, A symbol designation command indicating the jackpot symbol type as a result of the determination is set in an output buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104, the special symbol 1 determination process is completed, and the process returns to the special symbol standby process.

When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is not a jackpot in step S1625, it determines in step S1630 whether or not the result of the special drawing 1 jackpot determination is a small win. If the gaming control microcomputer 101 determines that it is a small winning symbol, it sets a symbol type flag indicating the small winning symbol in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104 in step S1631, and issues a symbol designation command indicating the small winning symbol in step S1632. is set in the output buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104, the special symbol 1 determination process is completed, and the process returns to the special symbol standby process.

When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is not a small hit in step S1630, it selects the special pattern 1 losing symbol type determination table in step S1633, and performs the special pattern 1 losing symbol type determination in step S1634.

The game control microcomputer 101 reads out the first stored random number of the symbol types stored in the special pattern 1 reservation storage section 105a to determine the special pattern 1 losing pattern. It is checked against the type determination table to determine which losing symbol type it is. When the game control microcomputer 101 performs the special figure 1 losing symbol type determination, in step S1635, it sets a symbol type flag indicating the losing symbol type that is the determination result in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104, and in step S1636, A symbol designation command indicating the losing symbol type which is the determination result is set in the output buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104, the special symbol 1 determination processing is completed, and the processing is returned to the special symbol standby processing.

Next, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process will be explained. FIG. 56 shows a flowchart of the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process. As shown in FIG. 56, in the special figure 1 pattern determination process, the game control microcomputer 101 first determines in step S1641 whether the game state related to the ease of opening of the second starting port 12 is currently a non-time saving state. Determine whether or not. When determining that the game control microcomputer 101 is in a non-time saving state, in step S1642, it selects the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state, while determining that it is not in a non-time saving state, that is, in a time saving state. Then, in step S1643, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the time saving state is selected, and the process proceeds to step S1644.

Subsequently, in step S1644, the game control microcomputer 101 checks the symbol type flag and the like to determine whether or not the special pattern 1 jackpot determination result is a jackpot. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special pattern 1 jackpot determination result is a jackpot, in step S1645, the game control microcomputer 101 selects a jackpot pattern from the special pattern 1 variation pattern determination table selected in step S1642 or step S1643. Select the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table. On the other hand, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special figure 1 jackpot determination result is not a jackpot, it checks the symbol type flag etc. in step S1645 and determines whether the special figure 1 jackpot determination result is a small hit or not. Determine. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special figure 1 big hit determination result is a small hit, in step S1647, the game control microcomputer 101 selects a small hit from the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table selected in either step S1642 or step S1643. Select the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for use, and proceed to step S1656.

When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special pattern 1 jackpot determination result is not a small hit, it checks the symbol type flag etc. in step S1648, and confirms that the result of the special pattern 1 losing symbol type determination is a losing symbol A. Determine whether or not. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the result of the special figure 1 losing symbol type determination is the losing symbol A, it performs reach determination in step S1649. In the reach determination, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the earliest stored reach random number stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a, and uses that reach random number as the current gaming state (non-time saving). It is determined whether there is a reach or there is no reach by comparing it with a reach determination table according to the state (state/time saving state).

In step S1650, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether the result of the reach determination is "with reach". If the result of the reach determination is that there is a reach, the game control microcomputer 101 selects the losing symbol A with the reach in the special symbol 1 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1642 or step S1643 in step S1651. After selecting the relevant special figure 1 variation pattern determination table, the process proceeds to step S1656, and if the result of the reach determination is not a reach, the current number of reserved special figures 1 is checked in step S1652, and the process is performed in step S1642 or step S1643. After selecting the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the no-reach losing pattern A corresponding to the number of reserved special figures 1 from among the special figure 1 variation pattern determination tables selected in any of the above, the process advances to step S1656.

When the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1648 that the result of the special figure 1 losing symbol type determination is not the losing symbol A, in step S1653, the game control microcomputer 101 checks the symbol type flag etc. and determines the special symbol 1 losing symbol type. It is determined whether the result is a losing symbol B or not. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the result of the special figure 1 losing symbol type determination is the losing symbol B, in step S1654, the game control microcomputer 101 selects the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1642 or step S1643. After selecting the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for losing symbol B, the process proceeds to step S1656, and if it is determined that the result of the special symbol 1 losing symbol type determination is not losing symbol B, in step S1655, losing symbol C is selected. After selecting the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for use, the process advances to step S1656.

When the game control microcomputer 101 selects the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table in steps S1645, S1647, S1651, S1652, S1654, and S1655, the game control microcomputer 101 selects the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table based on the selected special figure 1 variation pattern determination table in step S1656. Performs fluctuation pattern judgment. In the special figure 1 variation pattern determination, the game control microcomputer 101 reads the first stored special figure variation pattern random number stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage section 105a, and selects the special figure variation pattern. The pattern random number is compared with the selected special figure 1 variation pattern determination table to determine the special figure 1 variation pattern.

Subsequently, in step S1657, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a special figure 1 variation start command indicating the determined special figure 1 variation pattern in the output buffer, and in step S1658, sets the special figure 1 variation start command indicating the determined special figure 1 variation pattern. The corresponding special symbol variation time is set in the special operation timer, the special symbol 1 variation pattern determination process is completed, and the process returns to the special symbol standby process.

Next, the special symbol 2 determination process and the special symbol 2 variation pattern determination process in the special symbol standby process will be explained. First, the special figure 2 determination process will be explained. FIG. 57 shows a flowchart of the special figure 2 determination process. As shown in FIG. 57, in the special figure 2 determination process, the game control microcomputer 101 first determines in step S1661 whether or not the current gaming state related to the jackpot probability is the normal probability state. When determining that the game control microcomputer 101 is in the normal probability state, in step S1662, it selects the special chart 2 jackpot determination table for the normal probability state, while determining that it is not in the normal probability state, that is, in the high probability state. Then, in step S1663, the special chart 2 jackpot determination table for the high probability state is selected.

When the game control microcomputer 101 selects the special pattern 2 jackpot determination table, in step S1664, it performs the special pattern 2 jackpot determination based on the selected special pattern 2 jackpot determination table. In the special pattern 2 jackpot determination, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the first stored special pattern random number stored in the special pattern 2 reservation storage section 105b, and determines the selected special pattern 2 jackpot. Check it against the table and determine whether it is a jackpot or a loss.

In step S1665, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the result of the special drawing 2 jackpot determination is a jackpot. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is a jackpot, it selects the special pattern 2 jackpot symbol type determination table in step S1666, and performs the special pattern 2 jackpot symbol type determination in step S1667.

In the special pattern 2 jackpot symbol type determination, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the first stored random number of the symbol types stored in the special pattern 2 reservation storage section 105b, and determines the special pattern 2 jackpot symbol. It is checked against the type determination table to determine which jackpot symbol type it is. When the game control microcomputer 101 performs the special figure 2 jackpot symbol type determination, in step S1668, it sets a symbol type flag indicating the jackpot symbol type that is the determination result in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104, and in step S1669, A symbol designation command indicating the jackpot symbol type as a result of the determination is set in an output buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104, the special symbol 2 determination process is completed, and the process returns to the special symbol standby process.

If the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1665 that it is not a jackpot, that is, it is a loss, it selects the special pattern 2 losing symbol type determination table in step S1670, and in step S1671 selects the special pattern 2 losing symbol type determination table. conduct.

In the special pattern 2 losing symbol type determination, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the first stored random number of the symbol types stored in the special pattern 2 pending storage section 105b, and selects the special pattern 2 losing symbol. It is checked against the type determination table to determine which losing symbol type it is. When the game control microcomputer 101 performs the special figure 2 losing symbol type determination, in step S1672, it sets a symbol type flag indicating the losing symbol type that is the determination result in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104, and in step S1673, A symbol designation command indicating a losing symbol type as a result of the determination is set in an output buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104, the special symbol 2 determination process is completed, and the process returns to the special symbol standby process. As described above, in the first embodiment, only one type of losing symbol D is provided as the losing symbol type related to the special figure 2.

Next, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process will be explained. FIG. 58 shows a flowchart of the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process. As shown in FIG. 58, in the special figure 2 pattern determination process, the game control microcomputer 101 first determines in step S1681 whether the game state related to the ease of opening of the second starting port 12 is currently a non-time saving state. Determine whether or not. If the gaming control microcomputer 101 determines that it is in the non-time saving state, it selects the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state in step S1682, and proceeds to step S1689.

If the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1681 that the time saving state is not a non-time saving state, that is, the time saving state, the game control microcomputer 101 checks the type of the time saving flag described later in step S1683, and confirms that the time saving state is the time saving state after the jackpot game. Determine whether or not the state is the same. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the time saving state is a time saving state after a jackpot game, in step S1684, it selects the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the first time saving state and proceeds to step S1689.

If the gaming control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1683 that the time-saving state is not after the jackpot game state, it checks the type of the time-saving flag in step S1685, and confirms that the time-saving state is the time-saving state after the small winning symbol stop display. Determine whether or not. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the time saving state is the time saving state after the small winning symbol stop display, in step S1686, it selects the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the second time saving state, and in step S1689 Proceed to.

When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the time saving state is not the time saving state after the small winning symbol stop display, it checks the type of the time saving flag in step S1687, and the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the time saving state is not the time saving state after the small winning symbol stop display. Determine whether or not it is in a time saving state. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the time-saving state is the time-saving state after the losing symbol B is stopped and displayed, it selects the special symbol 2 variation pattern determination table for the second time-saving state in step S1686, and executes step S1686. On the other hand, if the process proceeds to S1689, if it is determined that the time-saving state is not after the losing symbol B stop display, the special symbol 2 variation pattern determination table for the third time-saving state is selected in step S1688, and the process proceeds to step S1689.

In step S1689, the game control microcomputer 101 checks the symbol type flag and the like to determine whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot determination result is a jackpot. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special figure 2 jackpot determination result is a jackpot, in step S1690, the game control microcomputer 101 selects the following in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table selected in any of steps S1682, S1684, S1686, and S1688. Select the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for jackpot. On the other hand, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special figure 2 jackpot determination result is not a jackpot, that is, a loss, it performs reach determination in step S1691. In the reach determination, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the earliest stored reach random number stored in the special figure 2 pending storage unit 105b, and uses that reach random number as the current gaming state (non-time saving). It is determined whether there is a reach or there is no reach by comparing it with a reach determination table according to the state (state/time saving state).

In step S1692, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether the result of the reach determination is "with reach". If the result of the reach judgment is that there is a reach, the game control microcomputer 101 determines, in step S1693, that there is a reach or lose in the special symbol 2 variation pattern determination table selected in any of steps S1682, S1684, S1686, or S1688. The process proceeds to step S1695 after selecting the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the game, and if the result of the reach determination is not a reach, the current number of reserved special figures 2 is checked in step S1694, and the process proceeds to steps S1682 and S1684. , S1686, S1688, the special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table for no-reach loss according to the number of special figure 2 reservations is selected, and then the process proceeds to step S1695.

When the game control microcomputer 101 selects the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table in steps S1690, S1693, and S1694, in step S1695, the game control microcomputer 101 performs the special figure 2 variation pattern determination based on the selected special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. . In the special figure 2 variation pattern determination, the game control microcomputer 101 reads the first stored special figure variation pattern random number stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage section 105b, and selects the special figure variation pattern. The pattern random number is compared with the selected special figure 2 variation pattern determination table to determine the special figure 2 variation pattern.

Subsequently, in step S1696, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a special figure 2 variation start command indicating the determined special figure 2 variation pattern in the output buffer, and in step S1697, sets the special figure 2 variation start command indicating the determined special figure 2 variation pattern. The corresponding special symbol variation time is set in the special operation timer, the special symbol 2 variation pattern determination process is completed, and the process returns to the special symbol standby process.

Next, the special symbol confirmation process will be explained. FIG. 59 shows a flowchart of the special symbol determination process. As shown in FIG. 59, in the special symbol confirmation process, the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not to finalize the special symbol by ending the stop display of the special symbol in step S1751, that is, in step S1703, It is determined whether the special figure confirmation time set in the operation timer has elapsed. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special symbol confirmation time has not elapsed, it ends the special symbol confirmation process. On the other hand, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special symbol confirmation time has elapsed, it determines in step S1752 whether or not it is currently in the normal probability state (high probability flag is OFF).

If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is not currently in the normal probability state, it proceeds to step S1757, and if it determines that it is currently in the normal probability state, it determines whether or not it is in the time saving state (the time saving flag is ON) in step S1753. Determine whether If the gaming control microcomputer 101 determines that it is not in a time saving state, the process proceeds to step S1757, and if it determines that it is currently in a time saving state, it subtracts "1" from the value of the remaining time saving counter in step S1754, and in step S1755. , it is determined whether the value of the time saving remaining number of times counter is "0" or not. When the gaming control microcomputer 101 determines that the value of the remaining time saving counter (remaining number of time saving) is not "0", it proceeds to step S1757, and the value of the remaining time saving number counter (remaining number of time saving) is "0". If it is determined that, in step S1756, the time saving state is shifted to a non-time saving state (the time saving flag is turned OFF), and the process proceeds to step S1757.

In step S1757, the gaming control microcomputer 101 checks the current gaming state, sets a gaming state command indicating the gaming state in the output buffer, and in step S1758, the special symbol currently being stopped and displayed is a jackpot symbol. Determine whether or not. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the symbol is a jackpot, it resets the game state (sets the normal game state) in step S1759. Specifically, it turns off the high probability flag and the time-saving flag, and sets the remaining time-saving number. (set the counter value to 0).

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a jackpot game preparation process in step S1760, changes the special operation status to "4" in step S1761, and ends the special symbol confirmation process. In the jackpot game preparation process, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a jackpot game control table corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104. In addition, a jackpot opening flag indicating that the opening is in progress according to the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed is turned on in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104, and a predetermined opening time (the jackpot game starts) is set according to the type of the jackpot symbol. Set the time from the time the game is played until the start of one round) to the special operation timer. Furthermore, in accordance with the type of jackpot symbol, an opening command indicating the type of jackpot symbol is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. The opening command corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol indicates that a jackpot game (opening of the jackpot game) corresponding to the type of the stopped and displayed jackpot symbol is started.

When the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1758 that the special symbol currently being stopped and displayed is not a jackpot symbol, it determines in step S1762 whether or not the special symbol currently being stopped and displayed is a small winning symbol. judge. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the symbol is a small winning symbol, it changes the special operation status to "6" in step S1763, and ends the special symbol confirmation process.

When the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1762 that the special symbol currently being stopped and displayed is not a small winning symbol, the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the special symbol currently being stopped and displayed is a losing symbol B or a losing symbol C in step S1764. Determine whether it exists or not. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that it is a losing symbol B or a losing symbol C, it changes the special operation status to "8" in step S1766 and ends the special symbol confirmation process, while If it is determined that it is not a losing symbol C, the special operation status is changed to "1" in step S1765, and the special symbol determination process is ended.

Here, the game state setting process after displaying small winning symbols (S1507) and the game state setting process after displaying losing symbols (S1509) will be explained. First, the game state setting process after displaying small winning symbols (S1507) will be explained. As described above, when the special operation status is "6", the game control microcomputer 101 performs the game state setting process after the small winning symbol is displayed. Since the game control microcomputer 101 plays the game in the time-saving state after the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, in the game state setting process after the small winning symbol is displayed, the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the time saving state is triggered by the stop display of the small winning symbol. A game state indicating that the time saving flag (time saving flag after small winning symbol display) is turned ON in the time saving flag area of the gaming RAM 104 to set the time saving state, and the time saving state is triggered by the stop display of the small winning symbol. The command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. Furthermore, since the condition for ending the time saving state is the number of executions of the special figure variable display "150", "150" times is set as the prescribed number of time saving times in the remaining time saving number counter. Then, the game control microcomputer 101 changes the special operation status to "7" and ends the game state setting process after displaying the small winning symbol.

Next, the game state setting process after losing symbol display (S1509) will be explained. As described above, when the special operation status is "8", the game control microcomputer 101 performs the game state setting process after displaying a losing symbol. The game control microcomputer 101 sets a time saving state based on the losing symbol type in the gaming state setting process after displaying a losing symbol. Specifically, if the stop display of the losing symbol B is performed, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a time saving flag (a time saving flag after the losing symbol B is displayed) indicating that the time saving state is triggered by the stop display of the losing symbol B. flag) in the time-saving flag area of the gaming RAM 104 to set the time-saving state, and also set a gaming state command indicating that the time-saving state is triggered by the stop display of the losing symbol B in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. do. Furthermore, since the condition for ending the time saving state is the number of executions of the special figure variable display "150", "150" times is set as the prescribed number of time saving times in the remaining time saving number counter. On the other hand, if the losing symbol C is stopped and displayed, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a time saving flag (time saving flag after losing symbol C is displayed) indicating that the time saving state is triggered by the stopping display of the losing symbol C. is turned on in a time-saving flag area of a gaming RAM 104 to set a time-saving state, and a game state command indicating that the time-saving state is triggered by the stop display of a losing symbol C is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. Further, since the condition for ending the time saving state is the number of executions of the special figure variable display "50" times, "50" times is set as the specified number of time saving times in the remaining time saving number counter. Then, the game control microcomputer 101 changes the special operation status to "1" and ends the game state setting process after displaying the losing symbol.

In addition, when setting the time saving state in the game state setting process after jackpot game (S1505), the game control microcomputer 101 sets the time saving flag (jackpot gaming state) indicating that the time saving state is triggered by the end of the jackpot gaming state. At the same time, the time saving state is set by turning on the time saving flag) in the time saving flag area of the gaming RAM 104, and a gaming state command indicating that the time saving state is triggered by the end of the jackpot gaming state is sent to the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. set. In addition, when the expected number of time savings is set as an end condition for the time saving state, that is, when setting the time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state related to jackpot symbols C and F, the end conditions of the time saving state are Since the number of executions of the variable diagram display is "100", "100" is set as the specified time saving number in the time saving remaining number counter.

In this way, in the game state setting process after jackpot game (S1505), the game state setting process after small winning symbol display (S1507), and the game state setting process after loss symbol display (S1509), as a time saving flag indicating the time saving state, Since the time saving flag after jackpot game state, the time saving flag after small winning symbol display, the time saving flag after losing symbol B is displayed, and the time saving flag after losing symbol C display are set, the game control microcomputer 101 operates based on the time saving flag. , it is possible to identify the time-saving state associated with the opportunity, appropriately select the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table related to the time-saving state, and perform the special figure 2 variation pattern determination.

Next, a description will be given of the performance when the performance control microcomputer 121 sets a time-saving state based on each trigger. First, the performance in the time saving state triggered by the end of the jackpot game state will be explained. FIG. 60 is a diagram mainly showing how the display section 50a performs an effect in the time-saving mode in the time-saving state triggered by the end of the jackpot game state. FIG. 60(A) is a diagram showing an ending effect being executed when a jackpot game ends as an effect before the effect in the time saving mode is performed, and FIG. 60(B) is a diagram showing an ending effect being executed when the ending effect is completed. Figures 60 (C) to 60 (E) show the situation immediately before the time saving mode is entered and the special figure variation effect starts, and Figures 60 (C) to 60 (E) show the special figure variation effect being performed in production mode B. It is a diagram.

As mentioned above, the performance control microcomputer 121 sets the time-saving performance mode when the jackpot game state ends, and sends the time-saving performance mode start command indicating the start of the time-saving performance mode to the output buffer of the performance RAM 124. set. The set time saving mode start command is transmitted to the image control board 140 through command transmission processing (S4004).

When the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives the time-saving mode start command, it switches from the ending background image G202 to the time-saving background image G130, as shown in FIGS. 60(A) to 60(B). In addition, the image CPU 141 will be controlled in the time saving state from now on, and in the time saving state, a game is basically played in which the second starting port 12 is won and the special figure 2 variable display is performed, so in a predetermined area of the display section 50a, An image (right-handed hitting image) G30 that encourages right-handed hitting is displayed. Furthermore, the image CPU 141 displays an image (remaining time saving number image) G31 indicating the remaining number of time saving times related to the time saving state in a predetermined area of the display unit 50a.

Note that the specific display contents of the right-hand hitting image G30 and the time saving remaining number of times image G31 are not particularly limited as long as the functions thereof can be exhibited, but in the first embodiment, the right-hand hitting image G30 is displayed horizontally on the display section 50a. The time-saving remaining number of times image G31 is composed of a band-shaped base portion extending across the entire direction and a plurality of figures representing right-pointing arrows arranged horizontally on the base portion, and the time-saving remaining number of times image G31 is composed of the characters “remaining number of times XX times”. It is made up of. In the “〇〇” portion of the remaining time saving number image G31, a number representing the actual remaining number of time saving times is displayed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 60(B), before the ending performance is finished and the special symbol variation performance in the time saving mode is started, "100" which is the specified number of time saving times related to the time saving state after the jackpot game state is is displayed. In addition, the image CPU 141 displays performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 related to the jackpot game in a stopped state before the ending performance ends and the special symbol variation performance in the time saving mode starts.

Then, when the first special symbol variation display is started in the time saving production mode, as shown in FIG. The remaining number of time savers is reduced by 1. Then, when the first special symbol variation display ends, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 60(D). Subsequently, when the second special symbol fluctuation display is started in the time-saving effect mode, as shown in FIG. The remaining number of time savings shown is further decreased by "1". After that, unless a jackpot is won, the special figure variation effect based on the special figure variation pattern is executed appropriately in the time saving production mode, and each time the special figure variation display is started, the time saving indicated by the remaining time saving number image G31 The remaining number of times decreases by "1".

Next, the performance performed in the time saving state triggered by the stop display of the small winning symbol, the time saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing symbol B, and the time reducing state triggered by the stopping display of the losing symbol C will be explained.

In the first embodiment, in the time saving state triggered by the stop display of the small winning symbol and the time saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing symbol B, the production mode corresponding to the time saving state is different from the time saving production mode. Set. Hereinafter, this performance mode will be referred to as "super chance mode". In the super chance mode, as in the case of the time saving production mode, a background image exclusively for the super chance mode (background image G140 for the super chance mode) is displayed on the display section 50a, and BGM for the super chance mode is played from the speaker 52. (BGM for super chance mode) is output. In the first embodiment, the super chance mode background image G140 is composed of a moving image that introduces the scenery of the golf course.

For example, when the performance control microcomputer 121 receives a gaming state command indicating a time-saving state triggered by the stop display of the small winning symbol and a gaming state command indicating a time-saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing symbol B, the production control microcomputer 121 performs the step After setting a new gaming state in the gaming state setting process of S4310, the production mode flag (super chance mode flag) indicating the super chance mode is turned ON in a predetermined area of the production RAM 124, and the super chance mode is started. The super chance mode start command shown is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. The set super chance mode start command is transmitted to the image control board 140 through command transmission processing (S4004).

When the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives the super chance mode start command, it switches the background image displayed immediately before on the display unit 50a to the super chance mode background image G140. In addition, the image CPU 141 will be controlled in the time saving state from now on, and in the time saving state, a game is basically played in which the second starting port 12 is won and the special figure 2 variable display is performed, so in a predetermined area of the display section 50a, A right-hand hitting image G30 is displayed. Further, the image CPU 141 displays a remaining time saving number image G31 representing the remaining number of time saving times related to the time saving state in a predetermined area of the display unit 50a.

On the other hand, in a time-saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing symbol C, a production mode corresponding to the time-saving state is set, unlike the time-saving production mode and the super chance mode. Hereinafter, this performance mode will be referred to as "short chance mode." In the short chance mode, a background image exclusively for the short chance mode (short chance mode background image G150) is displayed on the display section 50a, and the short chance Mode BGM (short chance mode BGM) is output. In the first embodiment, the short chance mode background image G150 is composed of a moving image showing a predetermined character jogging.

For example, when the production control microcomputer 121 receives a gaming state command indicating a time-saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing symbol C, after setting a new gaming state in the gaming state setting process of step S4310, the performance control microcomputer 121 switches to the short chance mode. A performance mode flag (short chance mode flag) indicating the effect is turned on in a predetermined area of the performance RAM 124, and a short chance mode start command indicating the start of the short chance mode is set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124. The set short chance mode start command is transmitted to the image control board 140 through command transmission processing (S4004).

When the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives the short chance mode start command, it switches the background image displayed immediately before on the display section 50a to the short chance mode background image G150. In addition, the image CPU 141 will be controlled in the time saving state from now on, and in the time saving state, basically a game will be played in which the second start opening 12 is won and the special figure 2 variable display is performed. A right-hand hitting image G30 is displayed. Further, the image CPU 141 displays a remaining time saving number image G31 representing the remaining number of time saving times related to the time saving state in a predetermined area of the display unit 50a.

Further, although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in the first embodiment, a special pattern variation effect related to a small hit, a special pattern variation effect related to a loss of loss pattern type B, and a special pattern variation effect related to a loss of loss pattern type C are described. In the production, after the reach is established, a production dedicated to these special symbol variation productions is executed. In the following, this dedicated performance will be referred to as a "challenge performance."

In the challenge performance, a background image dedicated to the challenge performance (background image for challenge performance) G116 is displayed as a background image on the display section 50a. That is, when reach is established, the display section 50a displays any of the normal background images that have been displayed up to that point (first normal background image G111, second normal background image G112, third normal background image G113). ), the screen switches to the challenge effect background image G116.

Next, specific examples of the super chance mode and the short chance mode will be explained. FIG. 61 is a diagram mainly showing how the display unit 50a is switched from the normal performance mode to the super chance mode, and the performance based on the super chance mode is performed. On the other hand, FIG. 61 is a diagram mainly showing how the display section 50a is switched from the normal performance mode to the short chance mode, and the performance in the short chance mode is performed.

First, I will explain super chance mode. FIG. 61(A) is a diagram showing a challenge performance being performed on the display unit 50a in the normal performance mode, and FIG. 61(B) is a diagram showing a challenge performance being performed on the display unit 50a in the normal performance mode, and a small Figure 61 (C) is a diagram showing how the stop display of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is executed in a manner that suggests a win and a loss of the losing symbol B, and also suggests that the super chance mode is set. , Figures 61 (D) to 61 (F) are diagrams showing the situation immediately before the special figure variation effect in the super chance mode is started after the normal effect mode ends, and the special figure variation effect in the super chance mode is performed. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 61(A), when the challenge effect is being executed in the special pattern variation effect, when the special pattern variation display related to the small hit and loss symbol B ends, as shown in FIG. 61(B), , a small hit, and a loss of the loss pattern B, and the stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed in a manner that suggests that the super chance mode is set. In the first embodiment, the left performance pattern EZ1 has the characters "A mode that suggests a small hit and a loss of the loss pattern B and also suggests that a super chance mode is set" regarding the performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3. An image containing "Super Chance" (left super chance mode suggestion image) G32a, an image G32b in which the medium effect pattern EZ2 contains the text "MODE" (middle super chance mode suggestion image), an image in which the right production pattern EZ3 contains the text "rush" ( (Right Super Chance Mode Suggestion Image) Each is composed of G32c.

Note that, hereinafter, the left super chance mode suggestion image G32a, the middle super chance mode suggestion image G32b, and the right super chance mode suggestion image G32c are collectively referred to as "super chance mode suggestion image G32." The display of the super chance mode suggestion image G32 suggests that the super chance mode is set.

As mentioned above, immediately after the special symbol confirmation process ends, a gaming state command indicating a time saving state triggered by the stop display of the small winning symbol or a gaming state indicating a time saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing symbol B is issued. Since the command is sent to the performance control board 120, the super chance mode is set according to the special pattern confirmation time that has passed since the stop display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3, and the super chance mode start command is issued. is transmitted to the image control board 140. Therefore, at this timing, as shown in FIG. 61(C), the challenge effect background image G116 is switched to the super chance mode background image G140. In addition, from now on, the control will be in the time saving state, and in the time saving state, basically a game will be played in which a prize is won in the second starting port 12 and the special figure 2 variable display is performed, so the right-handed image G30 will be displayed in a predetermined area of the display section 50a. Is displayed. Further, in a predetermined area of the display section 50a, a remaining time saving number image G31 related to the time saving state is displayed. In addition, in the first embodiment, the prescribed number of times for saving time related to the time saving state triggered by the stop display of the small winning symbol and the time saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing symbol B is "150", so it is a super chance. Immediately after setting the mode, when the remaining time saving number image G31 is displayed as shown in FIG. 61(C), the remaining time saving number image G31 suggests that the remaining number of time saving times is "150".

Subsequently, when the first special symbol fluctuation display starts in the super chance mode, as shown in FIG. The remaining number of time savings shown decreases by "1". Then, when the first special symbol variation display ends, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 61(E). Subsequently, when the second special symbol fluctuation display starts in the super chance mode, as shown in FIG. The remaining number of time savings shown is further decreased by "1". After that, unless a jackpot is won, the special pattern fluctuation performance based on the special pattern fluctuation pattern will be executed as appropriate in the super chance mode, and each time the special pattern fluctuation display starts, the time reduction indicated by the time reduction remaining number image G31 will be displayed. The remaining number of times decreases by "1".

Next, the short chance mode will be explained. FIG. 62(A) is a diagram showing a challenge performance being performed on the display unit 50a in the normal performance mode, and FIG. 62(B) is a diagram showing a challenge performance being performed on the display unit 50a in the normal performance mode, and a loss Figure 62 (C) is a diagram showing how the stop display of production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is executed in a manner that suggests that the symbol C is a loss and that the short chance mode is set. 62(D) to 62(F) are diagrams showing the state immediately before the special symbol fluctuation performance in the short chance mode is started after the completion of the special symbol fluctuation performance in the short chance mode. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 62(A), when the challenge effect is being executed in the special pattern variation effect, when the special figure variation display related to losing symbol C ends, as shown in FIG. 62(B), the losing symbol The performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a manner that suggests that C is a loss and that a short chance mode is set. In the first embodiment, the left performance pattern EZ1 has the characters "short chance" as "an aspect that suggests the loss of the loss pattern C and also suggests that the short chance mode is set" regarding the performance patterns EZ1 to EZ3. Image containing the image (left short chance mode suggestion image) G33a, image where the medium effect pattern EZ2 contains the text "mode" (medium short chance mode suggestion image) G33b, image where the right effect pattern EZ3 contains the text "rush" (right short chance mode suggestion image) G33c.

In addition, below, the left short chance mode suggestion image G33a, the medium short chance mode suggestion image G33b, and the right short chance mode suggestion image G33c are collectively referred to as "short chance mode suggestion image G33." The display of the short chance mode suggestion image G33 suggests that the short chance mode is set.

As mentioned above, immediately after the special symbol confirmation process is finished, the game state command indicating the time saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing symbol C is sent to the production control board 120, so the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped. In response to the elapse of the special figure confirmation time after the display, the short chance mode is set and a short chance mode start command is sent to the image control board 140. Therefore, at this timing, as shown in FIG. 62(C), the challenge effect background image G116 is switched to the short chance mode background image G150. Also, from now on, it will be controlled in a time-saving state, and in the time-saving state, a game will basically be played in which a prize is won in the second starting port 12 and the special figure 2 variable display is performed. Is displayed. Further, in a predetermined area of the display section 50a, a remaining time saving number image G31 related to the time saving state is displayed. In addition, in the first embodiment, the prescribed number of time saving times related to the time saving state triggered by the stop display of the losing symbol C is "50", so immediately after setting the short chance mode, as shown in FIG. 62(C) When the remaining time saving number image G31 is displayed, the remaining time saving number image G31 suggests that the remaining number of time saving times is "50".

Subsequently, when the first special symbol fluctuation display starts in the short chance mode, as shown in FIG. The remaining number of time savings shown decreases by "1". Then, when the first special symbol variation display ends, the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 62(E). Subsequently, when the second special symbol fluctuation display is started in the short chance mode, as shown in FIG. The remaining number of time savings shown is further decreased by "1". After that, unless a jackpot is won, the special pattern fluctuation performance based on the special pattern fluctuation pattern will be executed as appropriate in the short chance mode, and each time the special pattern fluctuation display is started, the time reduction indicated by the time reduction remaining number image G31 will be displayed. The remaining number of times decreases by "1".

Next, a characteristic game flow of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment will be explained. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a characteristic game flow of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment. When a game is being played in the normal gaming state, in other words, when the effects of the first normal effect stage, second normal effect stage, and third normal effect stage are being executed in the normal effect mode, When the stop display of the small winning symbol or the stop display of the losing symbol B is performed, the prescribed number of time-savings is 150 times and the second time-saving state special symbol 2 variation pattern determination table is used according to the stop display. A time saving state is set and the game shifts to a low probability, high base game state, and at the same time shifts to a super chance mode. On the other hand, when the stop display of the losing symbol C is performed, the time saving prescribed number of times is 50 and the time saving state is set in which the third time saving state special symbol 2 fluctuation pattern determination table is used, according to the stop display. A transition is made to a low probability, high base game state, and a transition is made to a short chance mode.

In addition, when a game is being played in the normal gaming state, in other words, when the effects of the first normal effect stage, second normal effect stage, and third normal effect stage are being executed in the normal effect mode. When the stop display of the jackpot symbol C is performed, the game shifts to the jackpot game state and also shifts to the jackpot production mode in accordance with the stop display. Then, in accordance with the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the stop display of the jackpot symbol C, a time saving state is set in which the prescribed number of time saving times is 100 and the special pattern 2 variation pattern determination table for the first time saving state is used. At the same time as transitioning to a high probability base gaming state, the game transitions to a time-saving performance mode. In addition, when the stop display of the jackpot symbols A and B is performed, the game shifts to the jackpot game state and also to the jackpot performance mode in accordance with the stop display. Then, in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the stop display of jackpot symbols A and B, a time saving state is set in which the first time saving state special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is used, and the transition to a high probability high base gaming state is established. At the same time, it shifts to the variable performance mode.

As described above, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 according to the first embodiment, the time saving state may occur without executing the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to give a positive surprise to the player and improve his/her interest in the game. In addition, if a losing pattern or a small winning pattern that is different from the jackpot pattern that generates a jackpot game is stopped and displayed, the time is shortened, so that the player has a sense of expectation for the stopping display of the losing pattern or the small winning pattern. This will improve your enjoyment of the game.

Also, if it is determined to be a losing symbol B or C in the losing symbol type determination before the special symbol variation display is performed, that is, it is determined that the time saving state can be made by determining whether or not the time saving state can be made. When this happens, the losing symbols B and C are stopped and displayed, so that the player is provided with an opportunity to be advantageous in addition to winning a jackpot. Therefore, the game becomes deeper and the game becomes more interesting. Furthermore, in addition to the stop display of losing symbols B and C and the stop display of small winning symbols, the time saving state may occur after a jackpot game is executed. In this way, by providing a plurality of routes to the time-saving state, the game is appropriately complicated and the game's interest is improved.

In addition, according to the pachinko game machine PY1, when a special symbol different from the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, it may enter a time-saving state, and the special symbol can be displayed in the time-saving state and in the normal gaming state (non-time-saving state). Since the conditions for determining the two variation patterns are different, specifically, the special figure two variation pattern determination tables are different, the game flow related to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can be appropriately complicated, and the game interest can be improved. . Furthermore, as special symbols different from the jackpot symbol that can be put into a time-saving state, there are a loss symbol B, a lose symbol C, and a small win symbol, and a stop display for the lose symbol B and a stop display for the small win symbol were performed. The conditions for determining the special pattern 2 variation pattern in the time-saving state are different between the case and the case where the stop display of the losing symbol C is performed.Specifically, the special pattern 2 variation pattern determination table is different. The game flow related to the pachinko game machine PY1 can be appropriately complicated, and monotony and boredom in a time-saving state can be prevented, thereby improving game interest.

(Example of modification of the first embodiment)
Next, a modification example of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the special figure 1 loss symbol types that cause the time saving state are two types, loss symbols B and C, but may be three or more types. In this case, as in the first embodiment, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used in the time saving state may be changed depending on the losing symbol type. In addition, in the first embodiment, the special pattern 2 losing symbol type includes only losing symbols that do not cause a time-saving state, but like the special pattern 1 losing symbol type, a losing symbol type that causes a time-saving state is provided. It's okay. In this case, in the time-saving state, the same special pattern 2 variation pattern determination table as any special pattern 1 losing symbol type that causes the time-saving state may be used; A different special figure 2 variation pattern determination table may be used.

Further, in the first embodiment, the special figure 2 jackpot determination table does not include a small win, but it may include a small win so that a small win can be won even in the special figure 2 jackpot determination. In this case, the time saving state may be set upon completion of the stop display of the small winning symbol. Furthermore, in the time saving state in this case, the same special pattern 2 variation pattern judgment table as after the stop display of the small winning symbol related to special pattern 1 may be used, or a different special pattern 2 variation pattern judgment table may be used. .

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the small winning symbols are not provided with a plurality of types like the losing symbols, but may be provided with a plurality of types like the losing symbols. In this case, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used in the time saving state may be different depending on the type of small winning symbol. Further, in the first embodiment, when the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the time saving state always occurs after the stop display, but there may be cases where the time saving state does not occur. That is, the small winning symbols may include a type of small winning symbol that causes a time saving state and a type of small winning symbol that does not cause a time saving state. Alternatively, only small winning symbols that do not cause a time saving state may be provided.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the time saving state can be entered by either the stop display of the small winning symbol or the stop display of the losing symbol, but as a trigger other than the end of the jackpot game state, only the stop display of one of the symbols It may also be configured so that it can be provided. Furthermore, the time-saving state may be caused by the fact that a small winning symbol is derived as a result of the jackpot determination by the jackpot determination, and by the fact that the small winning symbols B and C are derived as the result of the small winning symbol type determination by the small hit type determination. Instead, for example, it may be determined whether or not to generate a time saving state (time saving determination) before the jackpot determination. In this case, for example, a random number (time-saving random number) such as a jackpot random number is provided separately, and the judgment value of the time-saving random number is determined by generating a time-saving state and not generating a time-saving state. The time saving determination may be made by comparing the time saving determination table with an appropriately allocated time saving determination table. When it is determined in the time saving determination that the time saving state is to be generated, the time saving state may be set after the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed or after the losing symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, in this case, small winning symbols and losing symbols are determined depending on whether the time saving judgment results in a time saving state being generated or the time saving judgment resulting in a time saving state not occurring. It may be different. Furthermore, when a judgment result that a time saving state is generated in the time saving judgment is derived, the type of the small winning symbol or the losing symbol is further determined from among a plurality of types, and the jackpot according to the first embodiment is Like the symbol type determination and losing symbol type determination, the special symbol determination table and the prescribed number of time saving times (termination conditions) used in the time saving state may be different depending on the type of the small winning symbol or losing symbol.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the same special pattern 2 variation pattern determination table is used in the time saving state after the stop display of the small winning symbol and the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol B, but different A special figure 2 variation pattern determination table may be used. Further, although the time saving state after the stop display of the small winning symbol and the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol B shift to the same performance mode, they may shift to different performance modes.

Further, in the first embodiment, the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol B and the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol C shift to different production modes, but they shift to the same production mode. You can do it like this.

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the same prescribed number of times is set for the time saving state after the stop display of the small win symbol and the time saver state after the stop display of the losing symbol B, but the number of times is different. A prescribed number of time saving times may be set. Further, in the first embodiment, different prescribed times of time saving are set for the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol B and the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol C, but the same number of times is set. A prescribed number of time saving times may be set. Furthermore, the same specified number of times of time saving may be set in all of the opportunity time saving states related to the low probability high base gaming state.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the above-described basic embodiment of the present invention and the first embodiment. The second embodiment is similar to the first embodiment in that a time saving state may be set in response to the stop display of a small winning symbol and the stop display of a losing symbol. Below, as a second embodiment, the basic embodiment and points different from the first embodiment will be mainly described. Further, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the basic embodiment and the same configurations as the first embodiment, or similarly corresponding configurations.

In the first embodiment, in response to the end of the jackpot game, the stop display of the small winning symbol/loss symbol B, and the stop display of the losing symbol C, a common 1 is determined as a game state related to the ease of opening the second starting port 12. Two time-saving conditions were set. However, in the second embodiment, time-saving states with different ease of opening the second starting port 12 (ease of opening the second starting port 12) are set depending on the timing of the time-saving state. In the following, the time-saving state that is set when the jackpot game ends is referred to as the "first time-saving state," and the time-saving state that is set when the small winning symbol/losing symbol B is stopped is referred to as the "second time-saving state." The time saving state that is set in response to the stop display of the losing symbol C is referred to as the "third time saving state".

As explained in the basic embodiment, the second starting port 12 is opened as a configuration that affects the ease of opening the second starting port 12 (ease of opening the second starting port 12) related to the time saving state. There are the winning probability (winning winning probability), the normal pattern fluctuation time, and the opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game. Then, the hit judgment to determine whether it is a hit or not is performed using the hit judgment table, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern judgment to determine the normal pattern variation time is performed using the normal pattern fluctuation pattern judgment table, and the second starting gate The auxiliary game opened by No. 12 is played using the auxiliary game control table. Here, in the basic embodiment (first embodiment), ease of opening the second starting port 12 is associated with each table, and the table used in the non-time saving state and the table used in the time saving state However, in the second embodiment, in accordance with the fact that there are multiple types of time saving states, a table used in non-time saving states and a table used in non-time saving states are provided. The table is divided into a table used in the current state, a table used in the second time saving state, and a table used in the third time saving state.

FIG. 64(A) shows a configuration example of the hit determination table according to the second embodiment, FIG. 64(B) shows a configuration example of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern determination table according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 64(C) shows an example of the configuration of the auxiliary game control table according to the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 64(A), when the hit determination table for the non-time saving state is used, a hit is determined with a probability of 6600/65536, and when the hit determination table for the first time saving state is used. is determined to be a hit with a probability of 59936/65536, and if the hit determination table for the second time saving state is used, it is determined to be a hit with a probability of 50000/65536, and the hit determination table for the third time saving state is If it is used, it will be determined as a hit with a probability of 65,000/65,536. Therefore, it is likely to be determined as a hit in the order of third time saving state>first time saving state>second time saving state>non time saving state.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 64(B), when the regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table for the non-time-saving state is used, the regular figure fluctuation time is determined to be 30 seconds regardless of the type of ordinary figure to be stopped, When the first time-saving state's regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table is used, the regular figure fluctuation time is determined to be 5 seconds regardless of the type of regular figure to be stopped, and the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination table for the second time-saving state is determined. When the table is used, the ordinary figure fluctuation time is determined to be 7 seconds regardless of the type of ordinary figure to be stopped, and when the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern determination table for the third time saving state is used, the ordinary figure fluctuation time to be stopped is determined to be 7 seconds. Regardless of the type of figure, the ordinary figure variation time is determined to be 3 seconds. Therefore, in the order of third time saving state>first time saving state>second time saving state>non time saving state, the number of executions per unit time of the general figure fluctuation display increases (execution frequency) increases.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 64(C), when the auxiliary game control table for the non-time saving state is used, the opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game is 0.2 seconds, and the first time saving state When the auxiliary game control table for the auxiliary game is used, the opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game is 5.0 seconds, and when the auxiliary game control table for the second time saving state is used, the auxiliary game If the opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game is 4.0 seconds and the auxiliary game control table for the third time saving state is used, the opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game is 5.6 seconds. Become. Therefore, the opening time of the second starting port 12 in one auxiliary game increases in the order of third time saving state>first time saving state>second time saving state>non time saving state.

In this way, depending on the type of time-saving state, the hit determination table, normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table, and auxiliary game control table are different, and the probability of winning is determined as follows: 3rd time-saving state > 1st time-saving state > 2nd time-saving state The order is higher in the order of normal figure fluctuation time, the third time saving state>the first time saving state>the second time saving state is shorter, and the opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game is the third time saving state>the first time saving state. The time saving state is longer in the order of the second time saving state. As mentioned above, as the winning probability increases, the ease of opening the second starting port 12 increases, and as the regular pattern fluctuation time becomes shorter, the ease of opening the second starting port 12 increases. As the opening time of the starting port 12 becomes longer, the ease of opening the second starting port 12 increases. Therefore, in view of this, the ease of opening the second starting port 12 increases in the order of third time saving state>first time saving state>second time saving state, and it can be said that the time saving state is advantageous to the player.

In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 requires the first time saving state, the second time saving state, It is also necessary to specify the third time saving state. Here, in the first embodiment, the time saving flag after jackpot game state, the time saving flag after small winning symbol display, the time saving flag after losing symbol B display, and the time saving flag after losing symbol C display are set, and after the jackpot gaming state, The state where the time saving flag is turned on is specified as the "first time saving state", and the state where the time saving flag is turned on after the small winning symbol is displayed and the time saving flag is turned on after the losing symbol B is displayed is specified as the "second time saving state". Then, the state in which the time saving flag is turned on after the losing symbol C is displayed is specified as a "third time saving state".

Therefore, when making a hit determination in the normal symbol standby process of step S1102, the game control microcomputer 101 selects the hit determination table for the first time saving state if the time saving flag is ON after the jackpot game state, and selects the hit determination table for the first time saving state, and If the time saving flag after displaying a winning symbol and the time saving flag after displaying losing symbol B are ON, the hit determination table for the second time saving state is selected, and if the time saving flag after displaying losing symbol C is ON, the third time saving flag is selected. Select the hit judgment table for the state. In addition, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines the normal pattern variation pattern in the normal symbol standby process of step S1102, if the time saving flag is turned on after the jackpot game state, the gaming control microcomputer 101 determines the normal pattern variation pattern for the first time saving state. Select the table, and if the time saving flag after displaying the small winning symbol and the time saving flag after displaying losing symbol B are ON, select the normal pattern fluctuation pattern judgment table for the second time saving state, and select the time saving flag after displaying losing symbol C. When is turned on, the regular figure fluctuation pattern determination table for the third time saving state is selected. Furthermore, when controlling the auxiliary game (opening the second starting port 12) in the auxiliary game control process of step S1105, the game control microcomputer 101 controls the first Select the auxiliary game control table for the time-saving state, and if the time-saving flag after displaying the small winning symbol and the time-saving flag after displaying the losing symbol B are ON, select the auxiliary game control table for the second time-saving state, and select the auxiliary game control table for the second time-saving state. If the time saving flag is turned on after C is displayed, the auxiliary game control table for the third time saving state is selected.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the first time saving state, the second time saving state, and the third time saving state are the time saving state after the jackpot game state of the first embodiment, the time saving state after the small winning symbol stops/the losing symbol B stops. state, corresponds to the time saving state after the small hit symbol C stops. Then, the gaming state in which the normal probability state is set as the gaming state related to the probability of winning a jackpot and the first time saving state is set as the gaming state related to the ease of opening the second starting port 12 is referred to as "first low probability". "High base gaming state". Similarly, a gaming state in which a normal probability state is set and a second time saving state is set is referred to as a "second low probability high base gaming state", and a gaming state in which a normal probability state is set and a third time saving state is set. The gaming state in which is set is referred to as the "third low probability high base gaming state".

Further, in the second embodiment, as for the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table, in the first time saving state, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the first time saving state is used, as in the first embodiment. In the 2nd time saving state, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the 2nd time saving state is used, and in the 3rd time saving state, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the 3rd time saving state is used. Furthermore, as for the prescribed number of time saving in the time saving state, similarly to the first embodiment, the prescribed number of time saving in the first time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot symbols C and F is set to 100, and the second time saving prescribed number of times is set to 100. The specified number of times of time saving related to the state is set to 150 times, and the specified number of times of time saving related to the third time saving state is set to 50 times. In addition, regarding the production mode related to the time saving state, similarly to the first embodiment, the production mode related to the first time saving state after the end of the jackpot game of jackpot symbols C and F is set to the time saving mode, and the production mode related to the second time saving state is set to the time saving mode. The production mode related to the third time saving state is set to the super chance mode, and the production mode related to the third time saving state is set to the short chance mode.

Next, a characteristic game flow of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the second embodiment will be explained. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a characteristic game flow of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment. When a game is being played in the normal gaming state, in other words, when the effects of the first normal effect stage, second normal effect stage, and third normal effect stage are being executed in the normal effect mode, When the stop display of the small winning symbol or the stop display of the losing symbol B is performed, the prescribed number of time-savings is 150 times and the second time-saving state special symbol 2 variation pattern determination table is used according to the stop display. A second time saving state is set and the game shifts to a second low probability high base game state, and at the same time shifts to a super chance mode. On the other hand, when the stop display of the losing symbol C is performed, a third time saving state is set in which the prescribed number of time saving times is 50 and the special symbol 2 variation pattern determination table for the third time saving state is used, according to the stop display. Then, the game enters a third low probability, high base gaming state, and also enters a short chance mode.

In addition, when a game is being played in the normal gaming state, in other words, when the effects of the first normal effect stage, second normal effect stage, and third normal effect stage are being executed in the normal effect mode. When the stop display of the jackpot symbol C is performed, the game shifts to the jackpot game state and also shifts to the jackpot production mode in accordance with the stop display. Then, in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the stop display of the jackpot symbol C, a first time-saving state is set in which the prescribed number of time-savings is 100 and the first time-saving state special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is used. At the same time, the game shifts to a low probability high base game state and shifts to a time saving performance mode. In addition, when the stop display of the jackpot symbols A and B is performed, the game shifts to the jackpot game state and also to the jackpot production mode in accordance with the stop display. Then, in response to the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the stop display of jackpot symbols A and B, a time saving state is set in which the first time saving state special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is used, and the transition to a high probability high base gaming state is established. At the same time, it shifts to the variable performance mode.

As described above, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 according to the second embodiment, when the losing pattern B, the losing pattern C, and the small winning pattern, which are different from the jackpot pattern, are stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not executed and the time saving state is entered. , different types of time-saving states, in detail, the constituent elements (win Since the winning probability, normal figure fluctuation time, and opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game are different in the time saving state, the game flow related to the pachinko game machine PY1 is appropriately complicated, and the time saving state is not monotonous. It is possible to prevent boredom and improve the game's interest. Furthermore, in order to determine the special pattern 2 fluctuation pattern in the time-saving state in the case where the stop display of the losing pattern B and the small winning pattern are performed, and the case where the stop display of the losing pattern C is performed, Since the conditions are different, specifically, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is different, it is possible to vary the game related to the time saving state and improve the game interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 according to the second embodiment, when a jackpot game is executed, the time is shortened, and special symbols different from the jackpot symbols (loss pattern B, loss symbol C, small winning symbol) are displayed. When it is stopped and displayed, there are times when the time is shortened, and when a jackpot game is executed, and when a special symbol different from the jackpot symbol (losing symbol B, losing symbol C, small winning symbol) is stopped and displayed. , there are different types of time-saving states, more specifically, the constituent elements (winning probability, regular pattern fluctuation time, opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game) are different in the pachinko game machine PY1. The game flow can be appropriately complicated, and the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous or boring due to time-saving conditions, thereby improving the game's interest. Furthermore, a time saving state (first time saving state) when a jackpot game is executed and a time saving state (first time saving state) when special symbols different from the jackpot symbols (loss symbol B, lose symbol C, small winning symbol) are stopped and displayed. Since the ease with which the second starting port 12 can be opened differs between the second time saving state and the third time saving state, the time saving state can be varied and the enjoyment of the game is improved. In addition, the conditions for determining the special figure 2 variation pattern are different in the first time saving state, the second time saving state, and the third time saving state, specifically, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is different, so Furthermore, it is possible to vary the game related to the time-saving state, which improves the interest in the game.

(Example of modification of second embodiment)
Next, a modification example of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the second embodiment will be described. Game states (non-time saving state/first time saving state/second time saving state/third time saving state) related to the ease of opening the second starting port 12 (ease of opening the second starting port 12) in the second embodiment ) (probability of winning/win pattern fluctuation time/opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game) is not particularly limited, and can be changed as appropriate.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the ease of opening the second starting port 12 is set to be high in the order of third time saving state>first time saving state>second time saving state, but this order may be changed as appropriate. Also good. Further, the ease of opening of the second starting port 12 may be set to be the same or substantially the same between some or all types of time saving states. In this case, even if the overall ease of opening is the same or almost the same, the elements that make up the time saving state (probability of winning / normal figure fluctuation time / opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game) are different. By doing so, it is preferable that even if the overall ease of opening is the same or substantially the same, the details of the time-saving state are different, so that the player's experience with the time-saving state is different. This is because the gameplay, especially the time-saving conditions, can be diversified and the monotony of the game can be prevented.

In addition, in the second embodiment, when the normal pattern fluctuation pattern is determined for each time saving state, the same general pattern fluctuation time is determined regardless of the type of normal pattern (win/loss) that is stopped and displayed. , it may be determined at different ordinary figure fluctuation times depending on the type of ordinary figure. Furthermore, like the special pattern fluctuation pattern, it is configured so that it can be determined to one of a plurality of types of regular pattern fluctuation time for either or both of winning and losing. By acquiring a random number such as a fluctuation pattern random number, the regular pattern fluctuation time may be determined by judgment. In addition, in the second embodiment, the stop time of the normal symbol is constant regardless of the gaming state, but like the winning probability, the fluctuation time of the common symbol, and the opening time of the second starting port 12 in the auxiliary game, It may be different depending on the gaming state.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the special figure 1 losing symbol types that cause the time saving state are two types of losing symbols B and C, but there may be three or more types. In this case, as in the second embodiment, the type of time saving state may be changed depending on the type of losing symbol. In addition, in the second embodiment, the special pattern 2 losing symbol type includes only losing symbols that do not cause a time-saving state, but like the special pattern 1 losing symbol type, a losing symbol type that causes a time-saving state is provided. It's okay. In this case, in the time-saving state, the same special pattern 2 variation pattern determination table as any special pattern 1 losing symbol type that causes the time-saving state may be used; A different special figure 2 variation pattern determination table may be used.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the small winning symbols are not provided with a plurality of types like the losing symbols, but may be provided with a plurality of types like the losing symbols. In this case, the type of time saving state may be changed depending on the type of small winning symbol. Furthermore, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used may be different depending on the type of time saving state.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the same type of second time-saving state occurs after the stop display of the small winning symbol and after the stop display of the losing symbol B, but the time-saving states of different types are set. Also good. In this case, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used may be different depending on the type of time saving state. Further, although the time saving state after the stop display of the small winning symbol and the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol B shift to the same performance mode, they may shift to different performance modes. Further, in the second embodiment, the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol B and the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol C shift to different production modes, but they shift to the same production mode. You can do it like this.

Also, instead of causing a time-saving state due to the fact that a small hit symbol is derived as a result of the jackpot determination by the jackpot determination, or that the small win symbols B and C are derived as the result of the small hit symbol type determination by the small hit type determination. For example, it may be determined whether or not to generate a time saving state (time saving determination) before the jackpot determination. In this case, for example, a random number (time-saving random number) such as a jackpot random number is provided separately, and the judgment value of the time-saving random number is determined by generating a time-saving state and not generating a time-saving state. The time saving determination may be performed by comparing the time saving determination table with an appropriately allocated time saving determination table. When it is determined in the time saving determination that the time saving state is to be generated, the time saving state may be set after the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed or after the losing symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, in this case, small winning symbols and losing symbols are determined depending on whether the time saving judgment results in a time saving state being generated or the time saving judgment resulting in a time saving state not occurring. It may be different. Furthermore, when a judgment result that a time saving state is generated in the time saving judgment is derived, the type of the small winning symbol or the losing symbol is further determined from among a plurality of types, and the jackpot according to the first embodiment is Like symbol type determination and losing symbol type determination, depending on the type of the small winning symbol or losing symbol, the type of time saving state (elements constituting the time saving state (probability of winning, normal pattern fluctuation pattern, 2), the specific content of the opening time of the starting port 12), the special figure determination table used in the time saving state, and the prescribed number of time saving times (termination condition) may be different.

<Third embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the above-described basic embodiment of the present invention and the first embodiment. The third embodiment is almost the same as the first embodiment, but in the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol C, the time saving state after the stop display of the small win symbol, and the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol B. The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table used in the state is used, that is, the time-saving state after the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the time-saving state after the stop-display of the losing symbol B, and the time-saving state after the losing symbol C is stopped and displayed. This differs from the first embodiment in that the same special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is used in common. In the following, a basic embodiment and points different from the first embodiment will be mainly described as the third embodiment. Further, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the basic embodiment and the same configurations as the first embodiment, or similarly corresponding configurations.

FIG. 66 shows the special figure 2 variation used in the time saving state after the stop display of the small winning symbol, the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol B, and the time saving state after the stopping display of the losing symbol C in the third embodiment. A pattern determination table is shown. In addition, this special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used in the time saving state after the stop display of the small winning symbol and the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol B in the first embodiment. (Special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the second time saving state) However, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table common to these three time saving states is not limited to this, and the losing symbol C in the first embodiment is It may be a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the third time saving state) used in the time saving state after the stop display. Furthermore, the special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table common to these three time saving states is different from the special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table for the second time saving state and the special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table for the third time saving state. It may also be configured with a variation pattern determination table.

In addition, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table used in the time saving state after the stop display of the small winning symbol, the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol B, and the time saving state after the stopping display of the losing symbol C shall be the same. Accordingly, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process is changed as shown in FIG. 67. Specifically, if it is determined in step S1683 that the time-saving state is not after the jackpot gaming state, the process directly advances to step S1686, and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the second time-saving state is selected.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the special figure 2 variation pattern judgment used in the time saving state after the stop display of the small winning symbol, the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol B, and the time saving state after the stopping display of the losing symbol C Although the table is the same, the prescribed number of times of time saving is the same as in the first embodiment, the prescribed number of times of time saving related to the time saving state after the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, and the time saving state after the losing symbol B is stopped and displayed. is set to 150 times, and the prescribed number of times for time saving related to the time saving state after the stop display of losing symbol C is set to 50 times. However, the specified number of time reductions related to the time reduction state after the stop display of the small winning symbol and the time reduction state after the stop display of the loss symbol B are the same as the number of time reduction regulations related to the time reduction state after the stop display of the loss symbol C. Also good.

Furthermore, regarding the production mode, similarly to the case of the first embodiment, the production mode related to the time saving state after the stop display of the small winning symbol and the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol B is set as the super chance mode. The performance mode related to the time saving state after the stop display of the symbol C is set as the short chance mode. However, the production mode related to the time saving state after the stop display of the small winning symbol and the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol B may be the same as the production mode related to the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol C. .

As described above, according to the pachinko game machine PY1 according to the third embodiment, when a jackpot game is executed, the time is shortened and the special symbols different from the jackpot symbols (loss pattern B, loss symbol C, small win There are times when the time-saving state occurs when the symbols) are stopped and displayed, and when a jackpot game is executed, and when special symbols different from the jackpot symbols (losing symbols B, losing symbols C, and small winning symbols) are stopped and displayed. Since the conditions for determining the special figure 2 variation pattern are different from the case where the special figure 2 variation pattern is determined, specifically, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table is different, the game flow related to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is moderately complicated, and , it is possible to prevent monotony and boredom in the time-saving state, and improve the game's interest. In addition, there are losing symbols B, losing symbols C, and small winning symbols as special symbols (losing symbols B, losing symbols C, and small winning symbols) that are different from the jackpot symbols that cause a time-saving state, and the stop display of the losing symbol B The conditions for determining the special figure 2 variation pattern are the same in the later time saving state, the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol C, and the time saving state after the stop display of the small winning symbol. Since the variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 2 is shared, it is possible to prevent the game flow related to the pachinko game machine PY1 from becoming excessively complicated and reducing the interest in the game. Furthermore, the end condition, specifically the prescribed number of times, is set in the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol B, the time saving state after the stop display of the small winning symbol, and the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol C. Since the game is different, the time-saving state can be varied and the game becomes more interesting.

(Example of modification of third embodiment)
Next, a modification example of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the third embodiment will be described. Although the special pattern 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table used in the time saving state after the stop display of the small winning symbol, the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol B, and the time saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol C is the same, The special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table used in the time saving state after the stop display of symbol B and the special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table used in the time saver state after the stop display of losing symbol C are the same, and this feature The fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 2 may be different from the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table used in the time-saving state after the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, the prescribed number of time-savings related to the time-saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol B and the prescribed number of time-savings related to the time-saving state after the stop display of the losing symbol C are the same, and this prescribed number of time-savings and the small winning symbol The predetermined number of times of time saving related to the time saving state after the stop display may be different. In addition, the production mode related to the time-saving state after the stop display of the losing pattern B and the production mode related to the time-saving state after the stop display of the losing pattern C are the same, and this production mode and the stop display of the small winning pattern The production mode related to the later time saving state may be different.

Also, instead of causing a time-saving state due to the fact that a small hit symbol is derived as a result of the jackpot determination by the jackpot determination, or that the small win symbols B and C are derived as the result of the small hit symbol type determination by the small hit type determination. For example, it may be determined whether or not to generate a time saving state (time saving determination) before the jackpot determination. In this case, for example, a random number (time-saving random number) such as a jackpot random number is provided separately, and the judgment value of the time-saving random number is determined by generating a time-saving state and not generating a time-saving state. The time saving determination may be performed by comparing the time saving determination table with an appropriately allocated time saving determination table. When it is determined in the time saving determination that the time saving state is to be generated, the time saving state may be set after the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed or after the losing symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, in this case, small winning symbols and losing symbols are determined depending on whether the time saving judgment results in a time saving state being generated or the time saving judgment resulting in a time saving state not occurring. It may be different. Furthermore, when a judgment result that a time saving state is generated in the time saving judgment is derived, the type of the small winning symbol or the losing symbol is further determined from among a plurality of types, and the jackpot according to the first embodiment is As in symbol type determination and losing symbol type determination, the prescribed number of times of time saving (termination condition) may be different depending on the type of the small winning symbol or losing symbol.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described. The fourth embodiment is similar to the first embodiment in that a time saving state may be set in response to the stop display of a small winning symbol and the stop display of a losing symbol. In the following, the fourth embodiment will be mainly described based on the first embodiment, with respect to the differences from the first embodiment. Further, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the basic embodiment and the same configurations as the first embodiment, or similarly corresponding configurations.

One of the features of the fourth embodiment is the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used in the third time saving state. Specifically, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used may differ (switch) depending on the number of times the special figure variation is displayed in the third time saving state. This will be explained in detail below.

In the first embodiment, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table includes a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for non-time-saving states and a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for time-saving states. On the other hand, in this embodiment, there is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the third time saving state as the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the time saving state. That is, in the variable display of the special figure 1 in the third time saving state, a different special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table is used from the variable display of the special figure 1 in other time saving states. In addition, in the 1st time saving state and the 2nd time saving state, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table (FIG. 49(B)) for time saving states explained in 1st Embodiment is used. In addition, in this embodiment, there are a plurality of special figure 1 variation pattern determination tables for the third time-saving state, and the number of variable displays of the special figure in the third time-saving state (the number of special figure variations) is the predetermined switching variation number. Then, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table used when determining the special figure 1 variation pattern becomes different from the one before the switching variation number. For this reason, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table used when determining the special figure 1 variation pattern may differ depending on how many times the special figure is variablely displayed in the third time saving state.

FIGS. 68 and 69 show a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table used in the third time saving state in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 68(A) shows the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (for the third time saving state (special figure variation number 1 to 10) used when the number of special figure variations in the third time saving state is 1 to 10 times). Special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table). FIG. 68(B) shows the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (for the third time saving state (special figure variation number 11 to 30) used when the number of special figure variations in the third time saving state is 11 to 30). Special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table). FIG. 69 shows the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (special figure 1 for the third time saving state (special figure variation number 31 to 50) used when the number of special figure variations in the third time saving state is 31 to 50). (variation pattern determination table).

In other words, when a special figure is variablely displayed in the third time-saving state, if the variable display of the special figure is the variable display of special figure 1, and this is the first to tenth time in the third time-saving state, the 3. A special figure variation pattern is determined using the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the time saving state (number of special figure variations 1 to 10). When variable displaying a special figure in the third time saving state, if the variable display of the special figure is the variable display of special figure 1 and it is the 11th to 30th time in the third time saving state, the third time saving A special figure variation pattern is determined using the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the state (number of special figure variations 11 to 30). When variable displaying a special figure in the third time saving state, if the variable display of the special figure is the variable display of special figure 1 and it is the 31st to 50th time in the third time saving state, the third time saving A special figure variation pattern is determined using the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the state (number of special figure variations 31 to 50). In this way, in this embodiment, there are three special figure 1 variation pattern determination tables that can be selected in the third time saving state, and when the number of special figure variations reaches a predetermined number of switching variations, the table is used when determining the special figure 1 variation pattern. The special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table that is displayed will be different from before the number of switching fluctuations.

Further, in the first embodiment, one special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the third time saving state is used. In contrast, in this embodiment, there are multiple special figure 2 variation pattern determination tables for the third time-saving state, and the number of variable displays of the special figure in the third time-saving state (the number of special figure fluctuations) is determined by the predetermined switching. When it comes to the number of variations, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used when determining the special figure 2 variation pattern becomes different from before the number of switching variations. For this reason, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used when determining the special figure 2 variation pattern may differ depending on how many times the special figure is variablely displayed in the third time saving state.

FIG. 70 shows a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used in the third time saving state in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 70(A) shows the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (for the third time saving state (special figure variation number 1 to 5) used when the number of special figure variations in the third time saving state is 1 to 5). Special figure 2 variation pattern determination table). FIG. 70(B) shows the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (for the third time saving state (special figure variation number 6 to 40) used when the number of special figure variations in the third time saving state is 6 to 40). Special figure 2 variation pattern determination table). FIG. 70(C) shows the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (for the third time saving state (special figure variation number 41 to 50) used when the number of special figure variations in the third time saving state is 41 to 50). Special figure 2 variation pattern determination table).

In other words, when variable displaying a special figure in the third time-saving state, if the variable display of the special figure is the variable display of special figure 2 and this is the first to fifth time in the third time-saving state, the 3. A special figure variation pattern is determined using the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the time saving state (number of special figure variations 1 to 5). When variable displaying a special figure in the third time saving state, if the variable display of the special figure is the variable display of special figure 2 and it is the 6th to 40th time in the third time saving state, the third time saving A special figure variation pattern is determined using the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the state (number of special figure variations 6 to 40). When variable displaying a special figure in the third time saving state, if the variable display of the special figure is the variable display of special figure 2 and it is the 41st to 50th time in the third time saving state, the third time saving A special figure variation pattern is determined using the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the state (number of special figure variations 41 to 50). In this way, in this embodiment, there are three special figure 2 variation pattern determination tables that can be selected in the third time saving state, and when the number of special figure variations reaches a predetermined number of switching variations, the table is used when determining the special figure 2 variation pattern. The special figure 2 variation pattern determination table that is displayed will be different from before the number of switching variations.

Next, processing performed by the game control microcomputer 101, which differs in processing content from the first embodiment, will be described. Processing that is different from the first embodiment is the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process.

First, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process will be explained. Also in this embodiment, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process (S1610) is basically as shown in FIG. 56. However, in this embodiment, in step S1643, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table selection process for the time saving state shown in FIG. 71 is performed.

In the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table selection process for the time-saving state (S1643), the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not the time-saving state is after the jackpot game state (S2101). Whether or not the game is in the time-saving state after the jackpot game state can be determined by whether or not the time-saving flag after the jackpot game state is ON. If it is in the time saving state after the jackpot game (YES in S2101), the process advances to step S2102. On the other hand, if it is not in the time saving state after the jackpot game (NO in S2101), it is determined whether or not it is in the time saving state after the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed (S2103). Whether or not it is in the time saving state after the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed can be determined by whether or not the time saving flag after the small winning symbol is displayed is ON. If the time is shortened after the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed (YES in S2103), the process advances to step S2102. On the other hand, if it is not in the time-saving state after the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed (NO in S2103), it is determined whether or not it is in the time-saving state after the losing symbol B is stopped and displayed (S2104). Whether or not it is the time saving state after the losing symbol B is stopped can be determined by whether or not the time saving flag after the losing symbol B is displayed is ON. If the time is shortened after the losing symbol B is stopped and displayed (YES in S2104), the process advances to step S2102.

In step S2102, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for time-saving states other than the third time-saving state, that is, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for time-saving states shown in FIG. 49(B) is selected. In other words, if you are in a time saving state after a jackpot game, a time saving state after a small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, or a time saving state after a losing symbol B is stopped, that is, if you are in the first time saving state or the second time saving state, the same time saving state The state special figure 1 variation pattern determination table is selected.

On the other hand, if it is not in the time saving state after the stop display of losing symbol B (NO in S2104), that is, if it is in the third time saving state which is the time saving state after the stop display of losing symbol C, the value of the remaining time saving counter is less than 40. It is determined whether it is larger (S2105). Thereby, it is determined whether the variable display of the special figure related to the process is the 1st to 10th time since the third time saving state has been entered. If the value of the time saving remaining number of times counter is larger than 40 (YES in S2105), the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the third time saving state (special figure variation number 1 to 10) is selected (S2106).

Further, if the value of the time saving remaining number of times counter is 40 or less (NO in S2105), it is determined whether the value of the time saving remaining number of times counter is greater than 20 (S2107). Thereby, it is determined whether the variable display of the special figure related to the process is the 11th to 30th time since the third time saving state has been entered. When the value of the time saving remaining number of times counter is larger than 20 (YES in S2107), the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the third time saving state (special figure variation number 11 to 30) is selected (S2108).

Also, if the value of the time saving remaining number of times counter is 20 or less (NO in S2107), that is, if the variable display of the special figure related to the process is the 31st to 50th time since the third time saving state has been entered. , the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the third time saving state (number of special figure variations 31 to 50) is selected (S2109).

Next, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process will be explained. Also in this embodiment, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process (S1603) is basically as shown in FIG. 58. However, in this embodiment, in step S1688, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table selection process for the third time saving state shown in FIG. 72 is performed.

In the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table selection process for the third time saving state (S1688), the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether the value of the remaining time saving number counter is greater than 45 (S2205). Thereby, it is determined whether the variable display of the special figure related to the process is the first to fifth time since the third time saving state has been entered. If the value of the time saving remaining number of times counter is larger than 45 (YES in S2205), the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the third time saving state (special figure variation number 1 to 5) is selected (S2206).

Further, if the value of the time saving remaining number of times counter is 45 or less (NO in S2205), it is determined whether the value of the time saving remaining number of times counter is greater than 10 (S2207). Thereby, it is determined whether the variable display of the special figure related to the process is the 6th to 40th time since the third time saving state has been entered. When the value of the time saving remaining number of times counter is larger than 10 (YES in S2207), the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the third time saving state (special figure variation number 6 to 40) is selected (S2208).

Also, if the value of the remaining time saving counter is 10 or less (NO in S2207), that is, if the variable display of the special figure related to the process is the 41st to 50th time since the third time saving state has been entered. , the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the third time saving state (number of special figure variations 41 to 50) is selected (S2209).

Thus, in this embodiment, there are three special figure 1 variation pattern determination tables used for determining the special figure 1 variation pattern in the third time saving state. Based on the number of special figure fluctuations (the number of times the special figure is variablely displayed) after entering the third time saving state, one of the three special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination tables is used to determine the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern. is selected. Specifically, in this embodiment, different special pattern 1 variation patterns are determined when the number of special symbol variations after entering the third time saving state is 1 to 10 times, 11 to 30 times, and 31 to 50 times. The special figure 1 fluctuation pattern is determined by the table. In other words, when the number of special figure changes after entering the third time saving state reaches the predetermined number of switching changes (11 times, 31 times), the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment used to determine the special figure 1 variation pattern The table switches among the three special figure 1 variation pattern determination tables.

In addition, there are three special figure 2 variation pattern determination tables used for determining the special figure 2 variation pattern in the third time saving state. Then, based on the number of special figure variations after entering the third time saving state, one of the three special figure 2 variation pattern determination tables to be used for determining the special figure 2 variation pattern is selected. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the number of special pattern fluctuations after entering the third time saving state is 1 to 5 times, 6 to 40 times, and 41 to 50 times, different special pattern 2 fluctuation patterns are determined. The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern is determined by the table. In other words, when the number of special figure variations after entering the third time saving state reaches the predetermined number of switching variations (6 times, 41 times), the special figure 2 variation pattern judgment used to determine the special figure 2 variation pattern The table switches among the three special figure 2 variation pattern determination tables.

Therefore, the special symbol variation pattern determination table used for determining the special symbol variation pattern may differ depending on how many times the special symbol variation performance in the third time saving state has been performed since the third time saving state has been entered. In addition, in this embodiment, in the third time saving state, the number of switching fluctuations of the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table used for determining the special figure 1 variation pattern and the special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table used for determining the special figure 2 variation pattern The number of switching fluctuations is not the same.

Next, the performance performed by the performance control microcomputer 121 in the third time saving state will be explained. FIG. 73 is a diagram illustrating a state in which an effect based on the short chance mode is performed in the third time saving state on the display unit 50a. Also in this embodiment, in the short chance mode, a background image dedicated to the short chance mode (background image G150 for short chance mode) is displayed on the display unit 50a, and BGM for the short chance mode (BGM for short chance mode) is displayed from the speaker 52. is output.

Furthermore, in the short chance mode of this embodiment, when the special symbol variable display is started, the variable display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started, as shown in FIG. 73(A). The remaining time saving number shown by the remaining time saving number image G31 has a value set to 50 at the start of the short chance mode, and decreases by 1 with the start of the special symbol variation display. Further, in this embodiment, after the variable display of the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started, a performance that prompts the operation of the first performance button 40k (first performance button operation promotion performance) may be performed.

The first performance button operation promotion performance performed in the short chance mode of this embodiment differs depending on the special pattern variation pattern determination table used for determining the special pattern variation pattern. Specifically, in the case of the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (Fig. 68 (A)) for the third time saving state (number of special figure variations 1 to 10), button operation variation (1 time) may be performed. In the button operation variation (one time), a first effect button operation promotion effect is performed in which the button operation is prompted only once. In the case of the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (Fig. 68 (B)) for the 3rd time saving state (number of special figure variations 11 to 30), button operation variation (2 times) may be performed, and button operation variation ( 2 times), a first performance button operation promotion performance is performed in which the user is prompted to press the button twice. In the case of the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (Fig. 69) for the 3rd time saving state (number of special figure variations 31 to 50), button operation variation (3 times) may be performed, and button operation variation (3 times) Then, a first button operation promotion effect is performed in which the user is prompted to press the button three times. In the case of the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (Fig. 70 (A)) for the 3rd time saving state (number of special figure variations 1 to 5), button operation variation (repeated short press) may occur, and button operation variation ( In the case of ``Sequential press short'', a first effect button operation promotion effect is performed in which the user is encouraged to repeatedly press the button multiple times for a predetermined period of time. In the case of the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (Fig. 70 (B)) for the 3rd time saving state (number of special figure variations 6 to 40 times), button operation variation (long press repeatedly) may be performed, and button operation variation In (long press), a first button operation promotion effect is performed in which a button operation is encouraged to be performed continuously for a longer period of time than in the case of button operation variation (short press). In the case of the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (Fig. 70(C)) for the third time saving state (number of special figure variations 41 to 50), button operation variation (long press) may be performed, and button operation variation ( In the case of a long press), a first effect button operation promotion effect is performed in which a long press to continue the button operation for a predetermined period is encouraged.

FIGS. 73(B) and (C) are diagrams showing a case where a first effect button operation promotion effect with a pattern of button operation variation (one time) is performed. In the pattern first performance button operation promotion performance of button operation variation (one time), as shown in FIG. 73(B), the first performance button operation promotion performance image G12 is displayed on the display section 50a. The first performance button operation promotion performance image G12 includes an operation target image G12a representing the first performance button 40k that is the operation target, a press operation image G12b representing a press operation that is the operation mode of the first performance button 40k, and a first performance button 40k. It includes a first effect button operation valid period remaining time image G12c representing the remaining time of the first effect button operation valid period which is the operation valid period related to the operation of the effect button 40k.

The remaining time image G12c of the first performance button operation valid period is made up of a roughly curved progress bar, so that the player can easily understand the remaining time of the first performance button operation valid period as time passes. Changes to Note that FIG. 73(C) shows a state in which the first effect button operation valid period has occurred and 1/3 of the first effect button operation valid period has passed.

Then, when the special pattern fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation (first button jackpot fluctuation), after the first performance button 40k is pressed during the first performance button operation valid period, or after the first performance button operation valid period After the first production button 40k is not operated and the remaining time of the first production button operation validity period runs out, the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 stop in a manner indicating that it is a jackpot (a so-called "double" manner) is displayed (FIG. 73(D)). On the other hand, if the special pattern variation pattern is a loss variation (first button loss variation), after the first production button 40k is pressed during the first production button operation validity period, or after the first production button operation validity period After the first production button 40k is not operated and the remaining time of the first production button operation validity period runs out, the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 stop in a manner that indicates a loss (not a "Zero"). is displayed (FIG. 73(E)).

In this embodiment, in the first performance button operation promotion performance of the pattern of button operation variation (twice), two first performance button operation promotion performance images G12 are displayed. In the first performance button operation promotion performance with a pattern of button operation variation (three times), three first performance button operation promotion performance images G12 are displayed. In the first performance button operation promotion performance of the pattern of button operation variation (short press) and the pattern of button operation variation (long press), the continuous press operation, which is the operation mode of the first production button 40k, is used instead of the press operation image G12b. The image representing the image is displayed. In the first performance button operation promotion performance of the button operation variation (long press) pattern, an image representing a long press operation, which is the operation mode of the first performance button 40k, is displayed instead of the press operation image G12b.

As described above, the game control microcomputer 101 of the pachinko game machine PY1 according to the fourth embodiment controls the special figure 1 variation pattern during the third time saving state for each predetermined interval regarding the number of special figure variations in the third time saving state. The determination is made based on a different special figure 1 variation pattern determination table. In other words, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern during the third time saving state is different between before the number of special figure fluctuations in the third time saving state reaches the predetermined number of switching fluctuations and after the number of switching fluctuations. Determine based on the pattern determination table. The same applies to the special figure 2 variation pattern. Therefore, the special symbol variation time in the third time saving state may vary depending on the number of special symbol variations in the third time saving state. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous in the third time-saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, in the third time saving state, the number of switching fluctuations according to the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table and the number of switching fluctuations according to the special symbol 2 fluctuation pattern determination table are different. Therefore, it is possible to further prevent the game from becoming monotonous in the third time saving state.

(Example of modification of the fourth embodiment)
Next, a modification example of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. For example, in the fourth embodiment, there is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table used for determining the special figure 1 variation pattern in the third time saving state, and a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used for determining the special figure 2 variation pattern in the third time saving state. The variation pattern determination table has been described as being different from the variation pattern determination table. However, in the third time saving state, the special figure 2 variation pattern may be determined using the same special figure variation pattern determination table used for determining the special figure 1 variation pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of special symbol variations in the third time saving state is the 1st to 10th, the special symbol 2 variation pattern is determined using the special symbol variation pattern determination table of FIG. When the number of special symbol variations in the third time saving state is the 11th to 30th, it is determined using the special symbol variation pattern determination table of FIG. 68(B), and when the number of special symbol variations in the third time saving state is the 31st to 50th Sometimes, the determination may be made using the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 69. Also, in this way, in the third time saving state, even if the special figure 1 variation pattern and the special figure 2 variation pattern are determined using the same special figure variation pattern determination table, the number of switching variations is It may be different when determining the 1 variation pattern and when determining the special figure 2 variation pattern.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, only in the third time saving state, the special figure fluctuation pattern is determined based on a different special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for each predetermined section regarding the number of special figure fluctuations in the third time saving state. I explained it as such. However, even in other time-saving states, the special symbol fluctuation pattern may be determined based on a different special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table for each predetermined section regarding the number of special symbol fluctuations. Specifically, for example, even in the time-saving state (first time-saving state) after the jackpot game state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined based on a different special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table for each predetermined section regarding the number of special symbol fluctuations. It is also possible to decide based on In this case, for example, even in the first time saving state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern may be determined using the same special symbol variation pattern determination table as in the third time saving state. For example, even if the same special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table is used to determine the special pattern fluctuation pattern in the first time saving state and the third time saving state, the number of switching fluctuations will be different between the first time saving state and the third time saving state. It may be different depending on the time saving state and the time saving state. Also, for example, the number of switching changes of the special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table is the same in the first time saving state and the third time saving state, and different special figure fluctuation pattern judgment tables are used in the first time saving state and the third time saving state. It is also possible to determine the special figure fluctuation pattern.

<Fifth embodiment>
Next, a fifth embodiment will be described. The fifth embodiment is similar to the first embodiment in that a time saving state may be set in response to the stop display of a small winning symbol and the stop display of a losing symbol. In the following, the fifth embodiment will be mainly described based on the first embodiment, with respect to the differences from the first embodiment. Further, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the basic embodiment and the same configurations as the first embodiment, or similarly corresponding configurations.

One of the features of the fifth embodiment is the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used in the non-time saving state after the third time saving state. Specifically, the special figure 1 variation pattern judgment table and the special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table used may differ (switch) depending on the number of special figure variation displays in the non-time saving state after the third time saving state. It is in. This will be explained in detail below.

In the first embodiment, one special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the non-time-saving state is used. In contrast, in this embodiment, as a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state, a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table used in a specific section divided by a predetermined number of special figure variations after the third time saving state There is. That is, in the variable display of the special figure in the specific section after the third time saving state, a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table that is different from the variable display of the special figure other than the specific section in the non-time saving state is used. In addition, in the variable display of the special figure 1 other than the specific section after the third time-saving state, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table (FIG. 49(A)) for the non-time-saving state described in the first embodiment is used. In addition, in this embodiment, there are a plurality of special figure 1 variation pattern determination tables for the specific section after the third time saving state, and the number of variable displays of the special figure in the specific section of the third time saving state (the number of special figure fluctuations). ) becomes a predetermined switching variation number, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table used when determining the special figure 1 variation pattern becomes different from before the switching variation number reaches. For this reason, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table used when determining the special figure 1 variation pattern may differ depending on how many times the special figure is variablely displayed in the specific section of the third time saving state.

FIGS. 74 and 75 show the special symbol 1 variation pattern determination table used in the specific section after the third time saving state in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 74(A) is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (for non-time saving states after the third time saving state) used when the number of special symbol variations in the non-time saving state after the third time saving state is 1 to 5. (Special figure 1 variation pattern determination table of special figure variation number of times 1 to 5). FIG. 74(B) is a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (for non-time saving states after the third time saving state) used when the number of special symbol variations in the non-time saving state after the third time saving state is 6 to 8. (Special figure 1 variation pattern determination table with special figure variation number of times 6 to 8). FIG. 75 shows the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (for the non-time-saving state after the third time-saving state (special figure This is a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table with a fluctuation frequency of 9 to 10).

In other words, when a special figure is variablely displayed in a non-time-saving state, if the variable display of the special figure is the variable display of special figure 1, and it is the first to fifth time in the non-time-saving state after the third time-saving state. In this, a special figure variation pattern is determined using the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state after the third time saving state (special figure variation number of times 1 to 5). When variable displaying a special figure in a non-time-saving state, if the variable display of the special figure is the variable display of special figure 1, and it is the 6th to 8th time in the non-time-saving state after the 3rd time-saving state, , A special figure variation pattern is determined using the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state after the third time saving state (special figure variation number of times 6 to 8). When variable displaying a special figure in a non-time-saving state, if the variable display of the special figure is the variable display of special figure 1, and it is the 9th or 10th time in the non-time-saving state after the 3rd time-saving state, A special figure fluctuation pattern is determined using the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state after the third time saving state (number of special figure fluctuations 9 to 10). In this way, in this embodiment, there are three special figure 1 variation pattern determination tables that can be selected in a specific section where the number of special figure variations in the non-time saving state after the third time saving state is set from 1st to 10th. 3 The special figure 1 variation pattern determination table used may vary depending on the number of variable displays of the special figure in the specific section of the non-time saver state after the time saver state. In addition, even in the non-time saving state after the third time saving state, when the number of special symbol variations after the specific section is the 11th time or later, the special symbol 1 variation pattern for the non-time saving state explained in the first embodiment will be used. A determination table (FIG. 49(A)) is used. In this way, in this embodiment, there are four special figure 1 variation pattern determination tables that can be selected in the non-time saving state after the third time saving state, and when the number of special figure variations reaches a predetermined switching variation number, the special figure 1 variation pattern is selected. The special figure 1 variation pattern determination table used when determining the pattern will be different from before the number of switching variations.

Further, in the first embodiment, one special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the non-time-saving state is used. In contrast, in this embodiment, as a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for a non-time saving state, a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used in a specific section divided by a predetermined number of special figure variations after the third time saving state There is. That is, in the variable display of the special figure in the specific section after the third time saving state, a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table that is different from the variable display of the special figure other than the specific section in the non-time saving state is used. In addition, in the variable display of the special figure 2 other than the specific section after the third time-saving state, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table (FIG. 50(A)) for the non-time-saving state described in the first embodiment is used. In addition, in this embodiment, there are a plurality of special figure 2 variation pattern determination tables for the specific section after the third time saving state, and the number of variable displays of the special figure in the specific section of the third time saving state is determined by the predetermined switching variation. When it comes to the number of times, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used when determining the special figure 2 variation pattern becomes different from before the number of switching variations. For this reason, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used when determining the special figure 2 variation pattern may differ depending on how many times the special figure is variablely displayed in the specific section of the third time saving state.

FIG. 76 shows a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used in the specific section after the third time saving state in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 76(A) is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (for non-time saving states after the third time saving state) used when the number of special symbol variations in the non-time saving state after the third time saving state is 1 to 5. (Special figure 2 variation pattern determination table of special figure variation number of times 1 to 5). FIG. 76(B) is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (for non-time saving states after the third time saving state) used when the number of special symbol variations in the non-time saving state after the third time saving state is 6 to 10. (Special figure 2 variation pattern determination table with special figure variation number of times 6 to 10).

In other words, when a special figure is variablely displayed in a non-time-saving state, if the variable display of the special figure is the variable display of special figure 2, and this is the first to fifth time in the non-time-saving state after the third time-saving state. In this, a special figure variation pattern is determined using the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state after the third time saving state (special figure variation number of times 1 to 5). When variable displaying a special figure in a non-time-saving state, if the variable display of the special figure is the variable display of special figure 2, and it is the 6th to 10th time in the non-time-saving state after the 3rd time-saving state, , the special figure fluctuation pattern is determined using the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state after the third time saving state (number of special figure fluctuations 6 to 10). In this way, in this embodiment, there are two special figure 2 variation pattern determination tables that can be selected in a specific section where the number of special figure variations in the non-time saving state after the third time saving state is set from 1st to 10th. 3 The special figure 2 variation pattern determination table to be used may vary depending on the number of variable displays of the special figure in the specific section of the non-time saving state after the time saving state. In addition, even in the non-time saving state after the third time saving state, when the number of special symbol variations after the specific section is the 11th time or later, the special symbol 2 variation pattern for the non-time saving state explained in the first embodiment will be used. A determination table (FIG. 50(A)) is used. In this way, in this embodiment, there are three special figure 2 variation pattern determination tables that can be selected in the non-time saving state after the third time saving state, and when the number of special figure variations reaches a predetermined switching variation number, the special figure 2 variation pattern is selected. The special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used when determining the pattern will be different from before the number of switching variations.

Next, processing performed by the game control microcomputer 101, which differs in processing content from the first embodiment, will be described. Processes that are different from the first embodiment are special pattern 1 variation pattern determination processing, special pattern 2 variation pattern determination processing, and special symbol confirmation processing.

First, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process will be explained. Also in this embodiment, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process (S1610) is basically as shown in FIG. 56. However, in this embodiment, in step S1642, the special symbol 1 variation pattern determination table selection process for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. 77 is performed.

In the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table selection process for the non-time saving state (S1642), the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether the value of the after time saving counter is "0" or not (S3101). The post-time saving counter is provided in the gaming RAM 104 and is a counter that counts the remaining number of times in the specific section in the non-time saving state after the third time saving state. The post-time saving counter of this embodiment is set to a value "10" corresponding to the specific section in response to the third time saving state continuing for the prescribed number of time saving times and becoming a non-time saving state, and then set to a value "10" corresponding to the specific section. The number is subtracted by "1" in accordance with the variable display of the special figure. If the value of the after-time-saving counter is "0" (YES in S3101), special map 1 variation for non-time-saving states other than for non-time-saving states after the third time-saving state (for specific sections after the third time-saving state) A pattern determination table (that is, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 49(A)) is selected (S3102).

On the other hand, if the value of the post-time saving counter is not "0" (NO in S3101), it is determined whether the value of the post-time saving counter is greater than 5 (S3103). Thereby, it is determined whether the variable display of the special figure related to the process is the first to fifth time since the non-time saving state after the third time saving state. If the value of the after-time-saving counter is larger than 5 (YES in S3103), select the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the non-time-saving state (special figure variation number 1 to 5) after the third time-saving state (S3104) .

Further, when the value of the after-time saving counter is 5 or less (NO in S3103), it is determined whether the value of the after-time saving counter is greater than 2 (S3105). Thereby, it is determined whether the variable display of the special figure related to the process is the 6th to 8th time since the non-time saving state after the third time saving state. If the value of the after-time-saving counter is larger than 2 (YES in S3105), select the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the non-time-saving state (number of special figure variations 6 to 8) after the third time-saving state (S3106) .

In addition, if the value of the after-time-saving counter is 2 or less (NO in S3105), that is, the variable display of the special figure related to the process is changed for the 9th or 10th time after the non-time-saving state after the 3rd time-saving state. If so, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state after the third time saving state (special figure variation number of times 9 to 10) is selected (S3107).

In addition, when the value of the after-time-saving counter is not "0", after selecting the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table corresponding to the value of the after-time-saving counter, "1" is subtracted from the value of the after-time-saving counter (S3108).

Next, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process will be explained. Also in this embodiment, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process (S1603) is basically as shown in FIG. 58. However, in this embodiment, in step S1682, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table selection process for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. 78 is performed.

In the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table selection process for the non-time saving state (S1682), the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether the value of the after time saving counter is "0" or not (S3201). If the value of the after-time-saving counter is "0" (YES in S3201), special chart 2 variation for non-time-saving states other than for non-time-saving states after the third time-saving state (for specific sections after the third time-saving state) A pattern determination table (that is, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 50(A)) is selected (S3202).

On the other hand, if the value of the post-time saving counter is not "0" (NO in S3201), it is determined whether the value of the post-time saving counter is greater than 5 (S3203). Thereby, it is determined whether the variable display of the special figure related to the process is the first to fifth time since the non-time saving state after the third time saving state. If the value of the after-time-saving counter is larger than 5 (YES in S3203), select the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the non-time-saving state (number of special figure variations 1 to 5) after the third time-saving state (S3204) .

In addition, if the value of the after-time-saving counter is 5 or less (NO in S3203), that is, the variable display of the special figure related to the process will be changed for the 6th to 10th time after the non-time-saving state after the 3rd time-saving state. If so, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state after the third time saving state (special figure variation number of times 6 to 10) is selected (S3205).

In addition, when the value of the after-time-saving counter is not "0", after selecting the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table corresponding to the value of the after-time-saving counter, "1" is subtracted from the value of the after-time-saving counter (S3206).

Next, the special symbol confirmation process will be explained. FIG. 79 shows a flowchart of the special symbol determination process of this embodiment. The special symbol confirmation process of this embodiment performs processing related to the after-time-saving counter when the remaining number of time-savings is "0" (YES at S1755). The process is the same as that of the first embodiment (FIG. 59) except that processing related to the counter after this time saving is performed.

That is, when the remaining time saving number is "0" (YES in S1755), the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not it is in the third time saving state (S3301). Whether or not it is in the third time saving state can be determined by checking the type of the time saving flag. If it is the third time saving state (YES in S3301), the value "10" corresponding to the specific section is set in the time saving post counter (S3302), and the process advances to step S1756. On the other hand, if it is not in the third time saving state (NO in S3301), the value of the post time saving counter is reset to "0" (S3303), and the process advances to step S1756.

Thus, in this embodiment, there are four special figure 1 variation pattern determination tables used for determining the special figure 1 variation pattern in the non-time saving state after the third time saving state. Then, based on the number of special figure variations (the number of times the special figure is variablely displayed) after entering the non-time saving state after the third time saving state, the special figure 1 variation pattern is selected from among the four special figure 1 variation pattern determination tables. The one used to determine the is selected. Specifically, in this embodiment, the number of special symbol fluctuations after entering the non-time saving state after the third time saving state is 1 to 5 times, 6 to 8 times, 9 to 10 times, and 11 times or later, respectively. A special figure 1 variation pattern is determined by a different special figure 1 variation pattern determination table. In other words, when the number of special symbol fluctuations after entering the non-time-saving state after the third time-saving state reaches the predetermined number of switching fluctuations (6 times, 9 times, 11 times), the special symbol 1 fluctuation pattern is determined. The special figure 1 variation pattern determination table to be used is switched among the four special figure 1 variation pattern determination tables.

In addition, there are three special figure 2 variation pattern determination tables used for determining the special figure 2 variation pattern in the non-time saving state after the third time saving state. Then, one of the three special figure 2 variation pattern determination tables to be used for determining the special figure 2 variation pattern is selected based on the number of special figure variations after entering the non-time saving state after the third time saving state. . Specifically, in this embodiment, the number of special symbol fluctuations after the third time-saving state becomes a non-time-saving state is different from 1 to 5 times, from 6 to 10 times, and after 11 times, respectively. The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern is determined by the determination table. In other words, when the number of special symbol fluctuations after entering the non-time-saving state after the third time-saving state reaches the predetermined number of switching fluctuations (6 times, 11 times), the special symbol used to determine the special symbol 2 fluctuation pattern is used. The FIG. 2 variation pattern determination table switches among the three special figure 2 variation pattern determination tables.

Therefore, depending on how many times the special figure variation performance in the non-time saving state after the third time saving state has been performed since the non-time saving state after the third time saving state, the special figure variation effect used for determining the special figure variation pattern is determined. The figure variation pattern determination table may be different. In addition, in this embodiment, in the non-time-saving state after the third time-saving state, the number of switching fluctuations of the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table used for determining the special figure 1 variation pattern, and the special figure used for determining the special figure 2 variation pattern. The number of switching fluctuations in the two fluctuation pattern determination tables are not the same, but are partially different.

As described above, the game control microcomputer 101 of the pachinko game machine PY1 according to the fifth embodiment changes the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern in the non-time saving state after the third time saving state to the special figure 1 variation pattern in the non-time saving state after the third time saving state. The number of figure variations is determined based on a different special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for each predetermined section. In other words, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern in the non-time saving state after the third time saving state is the same as before the number of special symbol fluctuations in the non-time saving state after the third time saving state reaches the predetermined number of switching fluctuations, and before the number of switching fluctuations in the non-time saving state after the third time saving state. Later, it is determined based on a different special figure 1 variation pattern determination table. The same applies to the special figure 2 variation pattern. For this reason, the special symbol variation time of the special symbol variation pattern in the non-time saving state after the third time saving state may vary depending on the number of special symbol fluctuations in the non-time saving state after the third time saving state. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous in the non-time saving state after the third time saving state, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in the non-time saving state after the third time saving state, the number of switching fluctuations according to the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table and the number of switching fluctuations according to the special symbol 2 fluctuation pattern determination table are not the same but different. Therefore, it is possible to further prevent the game from becoming monotonous in the non-time saving state after the third time saving state.

(Example of modification of fifth embodiment)
Next, a modification example of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. For example, in the fifth embodiment, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table used for determining the special figure 1 variation pattern in a specific section of the non-time saving state after the third time saving state, and the The special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used for determining the special figure 2 variation pattern in a specific section has been explained as being different. However, in the specific section of the non-time saving state after the third time saving state, the special figure 2 variation pattern may be determined using the same special figure variation pattern determination table used to determine the special figure 1 variation pattern. . Specifically, for example, when the special figure 2 variation pattern is changed from 1st to 5th in the non-time saving state after the 3rd time saving state, the special figure variation pattern determination table of FIG. 74(A) is used. When the number of special symbol variations in the non-time saving state after the third time saving state is the 6th to 8th, it is determined using the special symbol variation pattern determination table of FIG. 74(B), When the number of special symbol fluctuations in the non-time saving state is the 9th or 10th time, the determination may be made using the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table of FIG. 75. Also, in this way, in the non-time-saving state after the third time-saving state, even if the special figure 1 variation pattern and the special figure 2 variation pattern are determined using the same special figure variation pattern determination table, the number of switching variations may be different when determining the special figure 1 variation pattern and when determining the special figure 2 variation pattern. Specifically, for example, when the special figure 2 variation pattern is changed from 1st to 5th in the non-time saving state after the 3rd time saving state, the special figure variation pattern determination table of FIG. 74(A) is used. When the number of special symbol variations in the non-time saving state after the third time saving state is the 6th to 10th, the determination may be made using the special symbol variation pattern determination table of FIG. 74(B).

In addition, in the fifth embodiment, only in the non-time saving state after the third time saving state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is set to a different characteristic for each predetermined section regarding the number of special symbol fluctuations in the non-time saving state after the third time saving state. It has been explained that the determination is made based on the figure fluctuation pattern determination table. However, even in the non-time-saving state after the other time-saving states, the special symbol fluctuation pattern may be determined based on a different special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table for each predetermined section regarding the number of special symbol fluctuations. Specifically, for example, even in the non-time-saving state after the time-saving state (first time-saving state) after the jackpot game state, the special pattern fluctuation pattern can be changed to a different special pattern fluctuation pattern for each predetermined section regarding the number of special pattern fluctuations. The determination may be made based on a pattern determination table. In this case, for example, even in the non-time-saving state after the first time-saving state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern may be determined using the same special symbol variation pattern determination table as in the non-time-saving state after the third time-saving state. Furthermore, for example, even if the same special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table is used to determine the special pattern fluctuation pattern for the non-time saving state after the first time saving state and the non-time saving state after the third time saving state, the number of switching fluctuations may be different between the non-time-saving state after the first time-saving state and the non-time-saving state after the third time-saving state. For example, the number of switching fluctuations of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table is the same in the non-time saving state after the first time saving state and the non-time saving state after the third time saving state, and The special figure variation pattern may be determined using different special figure variation pattern determination tables for the time saving state and the non-time saving state.

<Sixth embodiment>
Next, a sixth embodiment will be described. In the sixth embodiment, a time-saving state may be set by the stop display of a small winning symbol and the stop display of a losing symbol, and in the third time-saving state, a special symbol variation used for determining a special symbol variation pattern is set. This embodiment is similar to the fourth embodiment in that the pattern determination table differs based on the number of switching fluctuations. In the following, the sixth embodiment will be mainly described based on the fourth embodiment, and the differences from the fourth embodiment will be mainly explained. In addition, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those of the basic embodiment, the first embodiment, and the fourth embodiment, or similar configurations.

One of the features of the sixth embodiment is that in the third time saving state, the count condition for the number of special pattern fluctuations related to the switching condition (number of switching fluctuations) of the special pattern fluctuation pattern judgment table used for determining the special pattern fluctuation pattern is There are differences between those related to the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and those related to the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. That is, in the sixth embodiment, in the third time saving state, the condition for counting the number of special symbol fluctuations according to the switching condition of the special symbol 1 fluctuation pattern determination table and the special symbol according to the switching condition of the special symbol 2 fluctuation pattern determination table are set. The difference is that the conditions under which the number of figure fluctuations is counted are different. This will be explained in detail below.

In the fourth embodiment, in the third time saving state, both the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table used to determine the special figure 1 variation pattern and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used to determine the special figure 2 variation pattern, Selection is made based on the value of the time saving remaining number of times counter (time saving remaining number of times). In contrast, in this embodiment, in the third time saving state, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table used to determine the special figure 1 variation pattern and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used to determine the special figure 2 variation pattern are Each is selected (switched) based on the value of the counter counted under different conditions.

Here, processing performed by the game control microcomputer 101, which differs in processing content from the fourth embodiment, will be described. Processing that is different from the fourth embodiment is special symbol 2 variation pattern determination table selection processing for the third time saving state and special symbol determination processing.

First, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table selection process for the third time saving state will be explained. FIG. 80 shows a flowchart of the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table selection process for the third time saving state of this embodiment.

In the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table selection process for the third time saving state (S1688), the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether the value of the special figure 2 variation counter is greater than 45 (S3401) . The special figure 2 variable counter is provided in the gaming RAM 104 and is a counter that counts the remaining number of variable displays of the special figure 2 in the time saving state. The special figure 2 variable counter of this embodiment is set to the same value as the time-saving remaining count counter in response to the time-saving state being set, and then changes to "1" in accordance with the variable display of the special figure 2 in the time-saving state. It is subtracted in increments. That is, in step S3401, it is determined whether the variable display of the special figure 2 related to the process is the first to fifth time after entering the third time saving state. When the value of the special figure 2 variation counter is larger than 45 (YES in S3401), the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the third time saving state (number of special figure variations 1 to 5) is selected (S2206).

Moreover, when the value of the special figure 2 variation counter is 45 or less (NO in S3401), it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 variation counter is larger than 10 (S3402). Thereby, it is determined whether the variable display of the special figure 2 related to the process is the 6th to 40th time since the third time saving state has been entered. When the value of the special figure 2 variation counter is larger than 10 (YES in S3402), the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the third time saving state (number of special figure variations 6 to 40) is selected (S2208).

In addition, if the value of the special figure 2 variation counter is 10 or less (NO in S3402), that is, the variable display of the special figure 2 related to the process is the 41st to 50th time since the third time saving state has been entered. If there is, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the third time saving state (number of special figure variations 41 to 50) is selected (S2209).

In addition, after selecting the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the third time saving state, the value of the special figure 2 variation counter is subtracted by "1" (S3403).

Next, the special symbol confirmation process will be explained. FIG. 81 shows a flowchart of the special symbol determination process of this embodiment. The special symbol confirmation process of this embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment (FIG. 59), except that when the time saving remaining number of times is not "0" (NO in S1755), the process related to the special symbol 2 fluctuation counter is performed. It is.

That is, when the remaining time saving number is not "0" (NO in S1755), the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter is "0" (S3501). If the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter is "0" (YES in S3501), the process advances to step S1756. On the other hand, if the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter is not "0" (NO in S3501), the process advances to step S1757.

That is, in this embodiment, when determining the special figure 1 variation pattern in the third time saving state, the special figure 1 is selected from among the three special figure 1 variation pattern determination tables based on the value of the remaining time saving number counter. The one used to determine the fluctuation pattern is selected. On the other hand, in the third time saving state, when determining the special figure 2 variation pattern, the special figure 2 variation pattern is selected from among the three special figure 2 variation pattern determination tables based on the value of the special figure 2 variation counter. The one used for the decision is selected.

In addition, in this embodiment, there are two counters that count the number of variable displays of the special figure in the time saving state (the number of special figure fluctuations): a time saving remaining number counter and a special figure 2 fluctuation counter. The time saving remaining number of times counter is a counter whose value is subtracted when either the variable display of special figure 1 or the variable display of special figure 2 is performed. On the other hand, the special figure 2 fluctuation counter is a counter whose value is not subtracted when the variable display of special figure 1 is performed, but the value is subtracted only when the variable display of special figure 2 is performed. be.

Therefore, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table used to determine the special figure 1 variation pattern in the third time saving state is based on the fact that the special figure 1 variable display is performed regardless of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. and then switch. On the other hand, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used for determining the special figure 2 variation pattern in the third time saving state is switched based on the variable display of the special figure 2. Therefore, for example, after entering the third time saving state, first the variable display of special map 1 is performed twice in a row, and then the variable display of special map 2 is performed five times in a row. , the special figure 2 variation pattern of the variable display of the special figure 2 will be determined using the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the third time saving state (special figure variation number of times 1 to 5). That is, it is possible to select the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used for determining the special figure 2 variation pattern almost without being influenced by the number of variable displays of the special figure 1.

As described above, the game control microcomputer 101 of the pachinko game machine PY1 according to the sixth embodiment uses the special figure fluctuation pattern in the third time saving state to a count value that is counted according to the number of special figure fluctuations in the third time saving state. The determination is made based on different special figure fluctuation pattern determination tables. In other words, the special figure fluctuation pattern in the third time saving state is compared with before the count value counted according to the number of special figure fluctuations in the third time saving state reaches the switching count value corresponding to the number of switching fluctuations, and before the switching count value corresponds to the number of switching fluctuations. After that, the determination is made based on different special figure fluctuation pattern determination tables. Regarding the variable display of special figure 1 in the third time saving state, the value of the time saving remaining number counter that counts the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern together with the variable display of special figure 1 and the variable display of special figure 2 is the switching count. It is determined based on different special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection tables before reaching the switching count value and after reaching the switching count value. On the other hand, regarding the variable display of special figure 2 in the third time-saving state, the special figure 2 variation pattern is divided into two types: before the value of the special figure 2 variation counter that counts the variable display of special figure 2 becomes the switching count value, and the switching count value. After reaching the value, it is determined based on a different special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection table. Therefore, for example, in the third time saving state, a predetermined one can be used as the special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table used for determining the special figure 2 variation pattern without being influenced much by the number of variable displays of the special figure 1. The possibility of being able to select the number of times increases. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the selected special figure 2 variation pattern without being greatly influenced by the number of variable displays of the special figure 1. Therefore, while it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous in the third time-saving state, it is possible to execute the performance of the pre-planned content with high precision, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(Example of modification of the sixth embodiment)
Next, a modification example of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. For example, in the sixth embodiment, in the third time saving state, both the specified number of times related to the remaining time saving number counter and the specified number of times related to the special figure 2 fluctuation counter are the same number of times (50 times). Therefore, in the sixth embodiment, in the third time saving state, if the variable display of the special figure is performed 50 times, regardless of the number of variable displays of the special figure 1 and the number of variable displays of the special figure 2, Then, the third time saving state ends. However, in the third time saving state, the specified number of times related to the time saving remaining number of times counter and the specified number of times related to the special symbol 2 fluctuation counter may be different. That is, for example, the specified number of times related to the special figure 2 fluctuation counter may be smaller than the specified number of times related to the time saving remaining number of times counter. In this case, for example, the specified number of times of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter can be set to 20 times, which is smaller than 50 times, which is the specified number of times related to the time saving remaining number of times counter. For example, in the sixth embodiment, as a counter that counts the number of variable displays of the special figure in the third time saving state, in addition to the remaining time saving counter, the special figure 2 variation that counts only the number of variable displays of the special figure 2 is used. The configuration includes a counter. However, for example, as a counter for counting the number of variable displays of the special figure in the third time saving state, in addition to the time saving remaining number counter, a counter that only counts the number of variable displays of the special figure 1 may be provided. Furthermore, when a counter is provided that counts only the number of variable displays of the special figure 1, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table may be switched based on the count value of the counter.

For example, in the sixth embodiment, a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table used for determining the special figure 1 variation pattern in the third time saving state and a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table used for determining the special figure 2 variation pattern in the third time saving state are provided. 2 has been described as being different from the variation pattern determination table. However, in the third time saving state, the special figure 2 variation pattern may be determined using the same special figure variation pattern determination table used for determining the special figure 1 variation pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of variable displays of special figure 2 in the third time saving state is the 1st to 10th time, the special figure 2 variation pattern is changed using the special figure variation pattern determination table of FIG. 68(A). When the number of variable displays of special figure 2 in the third time-saving state is the 11th to 30th, it is determined using the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table of FIG. 68(B), and the special figure 2 in the third time-saving state is When the number of variable displays is from 31st to 50th, the determination may be made using the special figure variation pattern determination table of FIG. 69. Also, in this way, in the third time saving state, even if the special figure 1 variation pattern and the special figure 2 variation pattern are determined using the same special figure variation pattern determination table, the number of switching variations is It may be different when determining the 1 variation pattern and when determining the special figure 2 variation pattern.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, a seventh embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, a time-saving state may be set upon the stop display of a small winning symbol and the stop display of a losing symbol, and in the non-time-saving state after the third time-saving state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is not determined. This embodiment is similar to the fifth embodiment in that the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table used differs based on the number of switching fluctuations. In the following, the seventh embodiment will be mainly described based on the fifth embodiment, with respect to the differences from the fifth embodiment. Further, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as the basic embodiment, the first embodiment, and the fifth embodiment, or similar configurations.

One of the features of the seventh embodiment is that in the non-time-saving state after the third time-saving state, the number of special symbol fluctuations related to the switching condition (number of switching fluctuations) of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table used to determine the special symbol fluctuation pattern. The counting conditions are different between those related to the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and those related to the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. That is, in the seventh embodiment, in the non-time-saving state after the third time-saving state, the conditions for counting the number of special figure variations related to the switching conditions of the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table and the conditions for counting the number of special figure variations according to the switching conditions of the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table The difference is that the conditions under which the number of special symbol fluctuations related to the switching conditions are counted are different. This will be explained in detail below.

In the fifth embodiment, in the non-time saving state after the third time saving state, a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table used for determining the special figure 1 variation pattern, and a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used for determining the special figure 2 variation pattern. The table is selected based on the value of the after-time-saving counter (the number of variable displays of the special figure in the non-time-saving state after the third time-saving state). In contrast, in this embodiment, in the non-time saving state after the third time saving state, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table used for determining the special figure 1 variation pattern and the special figure 2 variation used for determining the special figure 2 variation pattern are used. The pattern determination table is selected (switched) based on the value of the counter counted under different conditions.

Here, processing performed by the game control microcomputer 101, which differs in processing content from the fifth embodiment, will be described. Processing that is different from the fifth embodiment is the special symbol 2 variation pattern determination table selection processing for the non-time saving state and the special symbol determination processing.

First, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table selection process for the non-time-saving state will be explained. FIG. 82 shows a flowchart of the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table selection process for the non-time saving state of this embodiment.

In the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table selection process for the non-time saving state (S1682), the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether the value of the post-time saving special figure 2 counter is "0" (S3601). ). The special figure 2 counter after time saving is a counter provided in the gaming RAM 104, and counts the number of variable displays of the special figure 2 in the non-time saving state after the third time saving state. The after-time saving special figure 2 counter of this embodiment is set to the same value (10 times) as the after-time saving counter in response to the third time saving state continuing for the specified number of time saving times and becoming a non-time saving state, and then being set to the non-time saving state. It is subtracted by "1" in accordance with the variable display of the special figure 2 in the time saving state. If the value of the post-time-saving special figure 2 counter is "0" (YES in S3601), the special figure for non-time-saving states other than the one for non-time-saving states after the third time-saving state (for the specific section after the third time-saving state) The FIG. 2 variation pattern determination table (that is, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 50(A)) is selected (S3202).

On the other hand, when the value of the special figure 2 counter after time saving is not "0" (NO in S3601), it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 counter after time saving is larger than 5 (S3602). Thereby, it is determined whether the variable display of the special figure 2 related to the process is the first to fifth time since the non-time saving state after the third time saving state. If the value of the special figure 2 counter after time reduction is larger than 5 (YES in S3602), select the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the non-time reduction state (special figure variation number 1 to 5) after the third time reduction state. (S3204).

In addition, if the value of the special figure 2 counter after time saving is 5 or less (NO in S3602), that is, the variable display of special figure 2 related to the process is changed to the non-time saving state after the third time saving state. -10th time, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state (number of special figure variations 6 to 10) after the third time saving state is selected (S3205).

In addition, if the value of the special figure 2 counter after time reduction is not "0", after selecting the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table corresponding to the value of the after time reduction special figure 2 counter, the value of the after time reduction counter is subtracted by "1". (S3206), "1" is subtracted from the value of the special map 2 counter after time saving (S3603).

Next, the special symbol confirmation process will be explained. FIG. 83 shows a flowchart of the special symbol determination process of this embodiment. The special symbol confirmation process of this embodiment performs processing related to the special symbol 2 counter after time reduction when the remaining time reduction number is "0" (YES in S1755). The process is the same as that of the fifth embodiment (FIG. 79) except that processing related to the counter after this time saving is performed.

In other words, if the remaining time saving count is "0" (YES in S1755) and the third time saving state is in effect (YES in S3301), the gaming control microcomputer 101 sets the after time saving counter (S3302) and then sets the after time saving counter (S3302). The special figure 2 counter is set to the value "10" corresponding to the specific section (S3701), and the process proceeds to step S1756. On the other hand, if it is not in the third time-saving state (NO in S3301), the value of the after-time-saving counter is reset (S3303), and then the value of the post-time-saving special map 2 counter is reset to "0" (S3702), and the process proceeds to step S1756. .

That is, in this embodiment, when determining the special figure 1 variation pattern in the non-time saving state after the third time saving state, the special figure 1 variation pattern is selected from among the four special figure 1 variation pattern determination tables based on the value of the post-time saving counter. , the one used for determining the special figure 1 variation pattern is selected. On the other hand, in the non-time saving state after the third time saving state, when determining the special figure 2 variation pattern, based on the value of the post time saving special figure 2 counter, from among the three special figure 2 variation pattern determination tables, The one used for determining the special figure 2 variation pattern is selected.

In addition, in this embodiment, two counters are used to count the number of times the special figure is variablely displayed (the number of times the special figure changes) in the non-time-saving state after the third time-saving state: the after-time-saving counter and the after-time-saving special figure 2 counter. be. The after-time-saving counter is a counter whose value is subtracted when either the variable display of special figure 1 or the variable display of special figure 2 is performed. On the other hand, the time-saving special figure 2 counter is a counter whose value is not subtracted when the variable display of special figure 1 is performed, but whose value is subtracted only when the variable display of special figure 2 is performed. It is.

For this reason, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table used to determine the special figure 1 variation pattern in the non-time saving state after the third time saving state is such that the variable display of the special figure is Switch based on what is being done. On the other hand, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used for determining the special figure 2 variation pattern in the non-time saving state after the third time saving state is switched based on the variable display of the special figure 2. Therefore, for example, after entering the non-time saving state after the third time saving state, first the variable display of special map 1 is performed twice in a row, and then the variable display of special map 2 is performed five times in a row. If the special figure 2 variation pattern of the variable display of the special figure 2 is carried out, the special figure 2 variation pattern judgment table for the non-time saving state (special figure variation number of times 1 to 5) after the third time saving state is used. The decision will be made based on the following.

As described above, the game control microcomputer 101 of the pachinko game machine PY1 according to the seventh embodiment changes the special figure fluctuation pattern in the non-time-saving state after the third time-saving state to the special figure fluctuation pattern in the non-time-saving state after the third time-saving state. It is determined based on a different special figure fluctuation pattern determination table based on the count value counted according to the number of fluctuations. In other words, the count value that is counted according to the number of special symbol fluctuations in the non-time saving state after the third time saving state is the switching count value corresponding to the number of switching fluctuations. It is determined based on different special figure fluctuation pattern determination tables before the switching count value is reached and after the switching count value is reached. Regarding the variable display of special figure 1 in the non-time saving state after the third time saving state, the variable display of special figure 1 is counted by the variable display of special figure 1 and the variable display of special figure 2 together. The value is determined based on different special figure 1 variation pattern selection tables before the value becomes the switching count value and after the value becomes the switching count value. On the other hand, regarding the variable display of special figure 2 in the non-time saving state after the third time saving state, the value of the special figure 2 counter after time saving, which counts the variable display of special figure 2, changes to the switching count value. It is determined based on different special figure 2 variation pattern selection tables before and after the switching count value is reached. Therefore, for example, in the non-time-saving state after the third time-saving state, a predetermined one is used as the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used for determining the special figure 2 variation pattern, but it is not influenced by the number of variable displays of the special figure 1. This increases the possibility that you can select a predetermined number of times without any problems. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the selected special figure 2 variation pattern without being greatly influenced by the number of variable displays of the special figure 1. Therefore, while it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous in the third time-saving state, it is possible to execute the performance of the pre-planned content with high precision, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(Example of modification of seventh embodiment)
Next, a modification example of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the seventh embodiment will be described. For example, in the seventh embodiment, in the non-time saving state after the third time saving state, both the specified number of times related to the after time saving counter and the specified number of times related to the special figure 2 counter after time saving are the same number of times (10 times). However, in the non-time saving state after the third time saving state, the specified number of times related to the after time saving counter and the specified number of times related to the post time saving special figure 2 counter may be different. That is, for example, the specified number of times related to the after-time-saving special figure 2 counter may be smaller than the specified number of times related to the after-time-shortened counter. For example, in the seventh embodiment, as a counter that counts the number of variable displays of special figures in the non-time saving state after the third time saving state, the number of variable displays of special figure 1 and the number of variable displays of special figure 2 are used. The configuration includes a time-saving after-time saving counter that counts together and a time-saving after-time special figure 2 counter that counts only the number of variable displays of the special figure 2. However, for example, the after-time-saving counter may be made to count only the number of variable displays of the special figure 1 in the non-time-saving state after the third time-saving state.

For example, in the seventh embodiment, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table used for determining the special figure 1 variation pattern in the specific section of the non-time saving state after the third time saving state, and the non-time saving state after the third time saving state. The special figure 2 variation pattern determination table used for determining the special figure 2 variation pattern in the specific section has been explained as being different from the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. However, in the specific section of the non-time saving state after the third time saving state, the special figure 2 variation pattern may be determined using the same special figure variation pattern determination table used to determine the special figure 1 variation pattern. . Specifically, for example, when the number of variable displays of special figure 2 in the non-time saving state after the third time saving state is the first to fifth, the special figure 2 variation pattern is changed to the special figure variation pattern of FIG. 74(A). Determined using the determination table, and when the number of variable displays of special figure 2 in the non-time-saving state after the third time-saving state is the 6th to 8th, it is determined using the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table of FIG. 74 (B) However, when the number of variable displays of the special figure 2 in the non-time saving state after the third time saving state is the 9th or 10th time, the determination may be made using the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table of FIG. 75. Also, in this way, in the non-time-saving state after the third time-saving state, even if the special figure 1 variation pattern and the special figure 2 variation pattern are determined using the same special figure variation pattern determination table, the number of switching variations may be different when determining the special figure 1 variation pattern and when determining the special figure 2 variation pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of variable displays of special figure 2 in the non-time saving state after the third time saving state is the first to fifth, the special figure 2 variation pattern is changed to the special figure variation pattern of FIG. 74(A). Determined using the determination table, and when the number of variable displays of special figure 2 in the non-time-saving state after the third time-saving state is the 6th to 10th, it is determined using the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table of FIG. 74 (B) You can also do it.

7. Other Modification Examples Next, other modification examples of the basic embodiment and the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment will be described below. Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the basic embodiment and the first embodiment will be referred to as "pachinko gaming machine PY1 etc."

In pachinko gaming machines such as PY1, the display section 50a is used to variably display the performance symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in order to notify the special drawing results, but instead of the image display device, a so-called "spinning drum type gaming machine" is used. (Slot machine)" A drum with a symbol displayed thereon may be provided, and the drum may be variably displayed to notify the result of the special drawing lottery. Furthermore, in the pachinko game machine PY1 and the like, the grand prize opening 14 can be opened in a jackpot game, but a winning area other than the grand prize opening 14 that can be opened in a jackpot game may be provided.

Furthermore, in the pachinko game machine PY1 and the like, when a particular jackpot symbol type is determined, the game always proceeds in a high probability state after the jackpot game. That is, the setting of the high probability state is associated with the jackpot symbol type. However, the setting conditions for the high probability state may be changed. For example, apart from the big winning device 14D, a second big winning device that can be opened and closed and into which a game ball can enter when opened is provided at a position in the gaming area 6 that can be reached by the game ball. In a predetermined round game, when the second big winning device is opened and the game ball that enters the second big winning device passes through a specific area provided on the downstream side, a high probability state occurs as the jackpot game ends. may be set.

In this case, for example, the second jackpot device releases a specific jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol that makes it easy to set a high probability state) for a time when it is easy to enter the ball (for example, 29.5 seconds), and the second jackpot device A non-specific jackpot symbol (a jackpot symbol that is difficult to set a high probability state) that is released for a difficult time (for example, 0.5 seconds) can be provided. Further, there are a specific area and a non-specific area as areas through which the winning game ball can pass through the second grand prize winning device, and a sorting device is provided for distributing the game ball into the specific area and the non-specific area. Although the opening time of the second grand prize device is the same, the combination of the opening mode of the second grand prize device and the operating mode of the sorting device creates a jackpot pattern and a high probability state that make it easy to set a high probability state. It is also possible to provide jackpot symbols that are difficult to set.

In addition, in the pachinko game machine PY1, etc., the game control board 100 performs basic control related to the progress of the game, and the performance control board 100 performs basic control related to the progress of the performance according to the progress of the game (game control). 120, game control and performance control are performed by different boards, but they may be configured to be performed by a single board. In this case, the image control board 140 may be included in that one board, or may be provided separately from that one board.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to other pinball gaming machines such as arranged ball machines and mahjong ball gaming machines, as well as reel-type gaming machines (so-called "slot machines").

8. Inventions Disclosed in the Above-mentioned Embodiments The following inventions A to D have been disclosed up to the previous paragraph of this [Detailed Description of the Invention]. In the description of Inventions A to D, the names and expressions of corresponding components in the embodiments of the invention described above, and the symbols used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, elements such as means constituting each invention are not limited to this appendix. Invention A is a generic term for the following inventions A1 to A4, invention B is a generic term for the following inventions B1 to B4, and invention C is a generic term for the following inventions C1 to C4, Invention D is a general term for the following inventions D1 to D4.

8-1-1. Invention A1
When a predetermined variation condition is established (a game ball enters the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12), it is possible to display the identification information (special symbol) in a variable manner, and the identification information is displayed in a specific manner (jackpot symbol). When stopped and displayed, the machine is equipped with a game control means (game control microcomputer 101) that executes a jackpot game that involves opening a variable prize opening (big prize opening 14) that can be opened and closed provided in the gaming area (gaming area 6). In the gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1),
The game control means is
It is possible to set the specific gaming state (time saving state) in which the variable starting port (second starting port 12) that can be opened and closed provided in the gaming area is easier to open than the normal gaming state,
The specific gaming state may be set in response to the identification information being stopped and displayed in a non-specific manner (loss symbol/small winning symbol) different from the specific manner;
The variation time (special figure variation time) of the variation display of the identification information during the specific gaming state is set before a predetermined switching condition is met (the number of special symbol variations becomes the number of switching variations) and after the switching condition is met. A gaming machine characterized in that the determination is made based on different conditions (special figure fluctuation pattern determination table) later.

8-1-2. Invention A2
A gaming machine according to invention A1,
The variable conditions include at least a first variable condition (a game ball enters the first starting port 11) and a second variable condition (a game ball enters the second starter port 12),
The game control means is
When performing a variable display of the identification information (variable display of special drawing 1) in accordance with the establishment of the first variable condition during the specific gaming state, the variation time is set to the first change condition, which is one of the switching conditions. Different conditions before the switching condition is met and after the first switching condition is met (the number of special figure variations during the third time saving state is determined by the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table used to determine the special figure 1 variation pattern) is determined based on the number of switching fluctuations for
When performing a variable display of the identification information (variable display of special figure 2) in response to the establishment of the second variable condition during the specific gaming state, the variation time is set to the switching condition different from the first switching condition. Before the second switching condition, which is a condition, is satisfied (the number of special symbol variations during the third time saving state becomes the number of switching variations for the special symbol 2 variation pattern determination table used for determining the special symbol 2 variation pattern), A gaming machine characterized in that the determination is made based on different conditions after the second switching condition is satisfied.

8-1-3. Invention A3
A gaming machine according to invention A1 or invention A2,
A gaming machine characterized in that the switching condition is established based on the number of times the identification information is displayed in a variable manner.

8-1-4. Invention A4
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions A1 to A3,
A gaming machine characterized in that the game control means may set the specific game state in response to the end of the jackpot game.

8-2-1. Invention B1
When a predetermined variation condition is established (a game ball enters the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12), it is possible to display the identification information (special symbol) in a variable manner, and the identification information is displayed in a specific manner (jackpot symbol). When stopped and displayed, the machine is equipped with a game control means (game control microcomputer 101) that executes a jackpot game that involves opening a variable prize opening (big prize opening 14) that can be opened and closed provided in the gaming area (gaming area 6). In the gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1),
The game control means is
It is possible to set the specific gaming state (time saving state) in which the variable starting port (second starting port 12) that can be opened and closed provided in the gaming area is easier to open than the normal gaming state,
The specific gaming state may be set in response to the identification information being stopped and displayed in a non-specific manner (loss symbol/small winning symbol) different from the specific manner;
The variation time (special figure variation time) of the variation display of the identification information after the specific gaming state is set before a predetermined switching condition is met (the number of special symbol variations becomes the number of switching variations) and after the switching condition is met. A game machine characterized in that a decision is made based on different conditions at different times.

8-2-2. Invention B2
A gaming machine according to invention B1,
The variable conditions include at least a first variable condition (a game ball enters the first starting port 11) and a second variable condition (a game ball enters the second starter port 12),
The game control means is
When performing a variable display of identification information (variable display of special figure 1) according to the establishment of the first variable condition after the specific gaming state, the variable time is set to the first switching condition, which is one of the switching conditions. Before the condition is satisfied (the number of special symbol fluctuations during the non-time-saving state after the third time-saving state becomes the number of switching fluctuations for the special symbol 1 fluctuation pattern determination table used for determining the special symbol 1 fluctuation pattern), and Determined based on different conditions after the first switching condition is satisfied,
When performing a variable display of identification information (variable display of special drawings 2) in accordance with the establishment of the second variable condition after the specific gaming state, the variation time is set to the switching condition different from the first switching condition. The second switching condition is satisfied (the number of special symbol fluctuations during the non-time-saving state after the third time-saving state becomes the number of switching fluctuations for the special symbol 2 fluctuation pattern determination table used for determining the special symbol 2 fluctuation pattern). ) A gaming machine characterized in that the determination is made based on different conditions before and after the second switching condition is satisfied.

8-2-3. Invention B3
A gaming machine according to invention B1 or invention B2,
A gaming machine characterized in that the switching condition is established based on the number of times the identification information is displayed in a variable manner.

8-2-4. Invention B4
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions B1 to B3,
A gaming machine characterized in that the game control means may set the specific game state in response to the end of the jackpot game.

8-3-1. Invention C1
When a predetermined first variation condition or second variation condition is met (a game ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12), it is possible to perform a variable display of identification information (special symbol), and the identification information When it is stopped and displayed in a specific manner (jackpot symbol), a game control means (game control means) executes a jackpot game accompanied by opening of a variable winning opening (big winning opening 14) that can be opened and closed provided in a gaming area (gaming area 6). In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) equipped with a microcomputer 101),
The game control means is
It is possible to set the specific gaming state (time saving state) in which the variable starting port (second starting port 12) that can be opened and closed provided in the gaming area is easier to open than the normal gaming state,
The specific gaming state may be set in response to the identification information being stopped and displayed in a non-specific manner (loss symbol/small winning symbol) different from the specific manner;
A switching condition is established based on a count value that is counted in response to the fluctuating display of the identification information during the specific gaming state (special figure fluctuation time) for the fluctuation time of the fluctuating display of the identification information during the specific gaming state. The number of figure fluctuations becomes the number of switching fluctuations) and after the switching conditions are established based on different conditions (special figure fluctuation pattern determination table),
The switching conditions are:
Regarding the variable display of identification information (variable display of special drawing 1) that is performed in accordance with the establishment of the first variable condition during the specific gaming state, the first count value (remaining number of time savings), which is one of the count values, counter value).
Regarding the variable display of the identification information (variable display of special drawing 2) performed in response to the establishment of the second variable condition during the specific gaming state, the second count is the count value different from the first count value. A gaming machine characterized in that a game may be realized depending on a value (value of a special figure 2 fluctuation counter).

8-3-2. Invention C2
A gaming machine according to invention C1,
One of the first count value and the second count value (the value of the time saving remaining number of times counter) is used as a variable display of identification information (variable display of special figure 1) that is not counted by the other (value of the special figure 2 variable counter). A gaming machine characterized in that the game machine is counted accordingly.

8-3-3. Invention C3
A gaming machine according to invention C2,
The one is counted in accordance with a fluctuating display of the identification information performed in response to the establishment of the first fluctuation condition and a fluctuating display of the identification information performed in response to the establishment of the second fluctuation condition,
The other is either a variable display of the identification information that is performed in response to the establishment of the first variation condition or a variable display of the identification information that is performed in response to the establishment of the second variation condition (the variable display of the special drawing 2). A game machine characterized in that the game machine is counted according to the display).

8-3-4. Invention C4
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions C1 to C3,
A gaming machine characterized in that the game control means may set the specific game state in response to the end of the jackpot game.

8-4-1. Invention D1
When a predetermined first variation condition or second variation condition is met (a game ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12), it is possible to perform a variable display of identification information (special symbol), and the identification information When it is stopped and displayed in a specific manner (jackpot symbol), a game control means (game control means) executes a jackpot game accompanied by opening of a variable winning opening (big winning opening 14) that can be opened and closed provided in a gaming area (gaming area 6). In a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) equipped with a microcomputer 101),
The game control means is
It is possible to set the specific gaming state (time saving state) in which the variable starting port (second starting port 12) that can be opened and closed provided in the gaming area is easier to open than the normal gaming state,
The specific gaming state may be set in response to the identification information being stopped and displayed in a non-specific manner (loss symbol/small winning symbol) different from the specific manner;
A switching condition is established based on a count value that is counted according to the fluctuation display of the identification information after the specific gaming state (special figure fluctuation time) for the fluctuation display of the identification information after the specific gaming state. The number of figure fluctuations becomes the number of switching fluctuations) and after the switching conditions are established based on different conditions (special figure fluctuation pattern determination table),
The switching conditions are:
Regarding the variable display of the identification information (variable display of special figure 1) performed in response to the establishment of the first variable condition after the specific gaming state, the first count value (after time reduction counter) which is one of the count values ), it may hold true based on the value of
Regarding the variable display of identification information (variable display of special drawing 2) that is performed in response to the establishment of the second variable condition after the specific gaming state, a second count that is the count value different from the first count value A gaming machine characterized in that a game may be established depending on a value (value of a time-saving special figure 2 counter).

8-4-2. Invention D2
A gaming machine according to invention D1,
One of the first count value and the second count value (value of the counter after time reduction) is used as a variable display of identification information (variable display of special figure 1) that is not counted by the other (value of special figure 2 counter after time reduction). A gaming machine characterized in that the game machine is counted accordingly.

8-4-3. Invention D3
A gaming machine according to invention D2,
The one is counted in accordance with a fluctuating display of the identification information performed in response to the establishment of the first fluctuation condition and a fluctuating display of the identification information performed in response to the establishment of the second fluctuation condition,
The other is counted according to either a fluctuating display of the identification information performed in response to the establishment of the first fluctuation condition or a fluctuating display of the identification information performed in response to the establishment of the second fluctuation condition. A gaming machine characterized by:

8-4-4. Invention D4
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions D1 to D3,
A gaming machine characterized in that the game control means may set the specific game state in response to the end of the jackpot game.

PY1...Pachinko gaming machine 1...Game board 11...First starting port 11a...First starting port sensor 12...Second starting port 12a...Second starting port sensor 14...Big prize opening 14a...Big prize opening sensor 40...First Production button device 40k...First production button 40a...First production button sensor 41...Second production button device 41k...Second production button 41a...Second production button sensor 50...Image display device 50a...Display section 52...Speaker 53... Frame lamp 55... Board movable device 55k... Board movable body 100... Game control board 101... Game control microcomputer 120... Production control board 121... Production control microcomputer 140... Image control board

Claims (3)

When a predetermined first variation condition or second variation condition is met, it is possible to execute a variable display of identification information, and when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, a variable prize opening provided in the gaming area that can be opened and closed is opened. In a gaming machine equipped with a game control means for executing a jackpot game with
The game control means is
It is possible to create a specific gaming state in which a variable starting port provided in the gaming area that can be opened and closed is easier to open than in a normal gaming state,
Depending on the end of the jackpot game, the specific game state may be set;
The specific gaming state may be set in response to stopping and displaying the identification information in a non-specific manner different from the specific mode;
Conditions in which the fluctuation time of the fluctuating display of the identification information is different between before the switching condition is established based on a count value counted according to the fluctuating display of the identification information during the specific gaming state and after the switching condition is satisfied. Decided based on
The switching conditions are:
The variable display of the identification information performed in response to the establishment of the first variable condition during the specific gaming state may be established based on the first count value, which is one of the count values,
The variable display of the identification information performed in response to the establishment of the second variation condition during the specific gaming state may be established in response to the second count value, which is the count value different from the first count value. Yes,
In the specific gaming state that is set in response to the end of the jackpot game, the established count value may be larger than in the specific gaming state that is set in response to stopping and displaying the identification information in the non-specific manner. A gaming machine characterized by: When a predetermined first variation condition or second variation condition is met, it is possible to execute a variable display of identification information, and when the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, a variable prize opening provided in the gaming area that can be opened and closed is opened. In a gaming machine equipped with a game control means for executing a jackpot game with
The game control means is
It is possible to create a specific gaming state in which a variable starting port provided in the gaming area that can be opened and closed is easier to open than in a normal gaming state,
Depending on the end of the jackpot game, the specific game state may be set;
The specific gaming state may be set in response to stopping and displaying the identification information in a non-specific manner different from the specific mode;
Conditions in which the fluctuation time of the fluctuating display of the identification information is different between before the switching condition is established based on a count value counted according to the fluctuating display of the identification information during the specific gaming state and after the switching condition is satisfied. Decided based on
The switching conditions are:
The variable display of the identification information performed in response to the establishment of the first variable condition during the specific gaming state may be established based on the first count value, which is one of the count values,
The variable display of the identification information performed in response to the establishment of the second variation condition during the specific gaming state may be established in response to the second count value, which is the count value different from the first count value. Yes,
In the specific gaming state that is set in response to the end of the jackpot game, the established count value may be smaller than in the specific gaming state that is set in response to stopping and displaying the identification information in the non-specific manner. A gaming machine characterized by: The gaming machine according to claim 1 or claim 2 ,
A gaming machine characterized in that one of the first count value and the second count value is counted in accordance with a fluctuating display of identification information that is not counted by the other one.

Images